Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 342

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager


1626LM Optical Network Design Platform (ONDP) | Release 7.0
User Guide
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA
Issue 4 | March 2013

Legal notice
Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Security Statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowances or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited Warranty

For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering information

The ordering number for this product guide is 3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA.


To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representatives or use Online Customer Support (OLCS) https://support.lucent.com
(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com).

Contents
About this document
xix
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xix
Intended audience

...................................................................................................................................................................... xix
xix

How to use this information product ................................................................................................................................... xix


Related documents

...................................................................................................................................................................... xx
xx

Related training ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxi


xxi
Technical support
How to order

....................................................................................................................................................................... xxi
xxi

................................................................................................................................................................................ xxi
xxi

Quality policy ............................................................................................................................................................................. xxii


xxii
How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxii
xxii
1

Introduction
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
Features ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-2
Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1-8
The ONDP Interface

................................................................................................................................................................ 1-9
1-9

Installation and Startup


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1
Installation Requirements

...................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-2

Installer Welcome Window

................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-4

InstallShield Wizard Window ............................................................................................................................................... 2-6


2-6
Install ONDP

.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2-7

Update ONDP Version .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-10


2-10
Uninstall ONDP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
iii
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Launch ONDP

......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-13

Close ONDP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-14


2-14
3

ONDP User Interface


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-1
Main Menu and Toolbar ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2
Map Legend .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-13
3-13

Design Inputs
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-1
Section 1: Starting the Design
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-3
Design Inputs .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4-4
Incremental Design

.................................................................................................................................................................. 4-6
4-6

Create a New Project ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-9


4-9
Open an Existing Project (.ondp file) .............................................................................................................................. 4-11
4-11
Section 2: Sites
Overview
Sites

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4-13

............................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-14
4-14

Create Sites ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4-24


4-24
Edit NE Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-26
4-26
Edit Site Parameters

.............................................................................................................................................................. 4-28
4-28

Delete Sites ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4-29


4-29
Section 3: ILAs
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-30
4-30

ILAs ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-31


4-31
Change ILA Site Name

........................................................................................................................................................ 4-34
4-34

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
iv
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 4: Links and Spans


Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-36
4-36

Links and Spans ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-37


4-37
Create Links and Spans ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-46
4-46
Edit Links and Spans ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-47
4-47
Add Spans to Links ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-48
4-48
Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span ................................................................................................... 4-50
4-50
Merge Spans ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-52
4-52
Delete Links and Spans ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-54
4-54
Identify a Link on the Map

................................................................................................................................................. 4-55
4-55

Section 5: Relations and Services


Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-56
4-56

Relations and Services .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-57


4-57
Create a Relation

.................................................................................................................................................................... 4-78
4-78

Edit Relations and Services ................................................................................................................................................ 4-79


4-79
Create Services ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-80
4-80
Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service ......................................................................................... 4-82
4-82
Delete Relations and Services

........................................................................................................................................... 4-84
4-84

Identify a Relation on the Map .......................................................................................................................................... 4-85


4-85
Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints .............................................................................................................................. 4-86
4-86
Section 6: Optical Subsets
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-88
4-88

Optical Subsets ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-89


4-89
Create Optical Subset ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-97
4-97
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope
Overview

................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-98
4-98

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
v
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) ............................................................................................................................................... 4-99


4-99
Failures Scope ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-105
4-105
Create an SRG ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-109
4-109
Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs ........................................................................................................................... 4-110
4-110
Delete SRGs ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-111
4-111
Edit a Failures Scope

.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-112
4-112

Section 8: Design Parameters


Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-114
4-114
Design Parameters

............................................................................................................................................................... 4-115
4-115

WDM Layer Design Parameters

.................................................................................................................................... 4-117
4-117

Traffic Setting Design Parameters ................................................................................................................................. 4-122


4-122
Set Design Parameters
5

....................................................................................................................................................... 4-125
4-125

Run the Network Design


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-1
The Network Design ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5-2
Run the Full Network Design ............................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5-4
Run Partial Network Designs for Links

........................................................................................................................... 5-5
5-5

Design Results
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-1
Design Results and Reports

.................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6-2

Show/Tune Selected Links Design

.................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6-3

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................... 6-6


6-6
Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria ....................................................................................... 6-15
6-15
Show Graphical Statistics .................................................................................................................................................... 6-17
6-17
Show Network Statistics ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6-21
Show Failures Report ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-24
6-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
vi
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show GMRE Audit Logs ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-31


6-31
Show Traffic Design Logs
Show Errors Report

.................................................................................................................................................. 6-34
6-34

............................................................................................................................................................... 6-35
6-35

Show Bill of Material

........................................................................................................................................................... 6-37
6-37

Show Bill of Material (multi-step) ................................................................................................................................... 6-38


6-38
Show Sites/Part List

.............................................................................................................................................................. 6-39
6-39

Show Equipment View ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-40


6-40
Show Line View ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-41
6-41
Export Design Results Excel Report ............................................................................................................................... 6-45
6-45
Export BoM .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-71
6-71
7

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-1
Network Configuration in ONDP

...................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2

Network Analysis: Audit ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-4


7-4
Network Analysis: Upgrade .................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7-7
Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis GMRE Simulator ................................................................................ 7-9
7-9
8

Modifications for ONDP Design


Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8-1
Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts .................................................................................... 8-2
8-2
Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface ..................................................................................... 8-7
8-7
Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts .................................................................................. 8-15
8-15
Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface ................................................................................... 8-16
8-16

Map Management
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-1
Map Generation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9-2
Launch the Map Generation Application ......................................................................................................................... 9-7
9-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
vii
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generate a Background Map

................................................................................................................................................ 9-8
9-8

Glossary
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
viii
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of tables
2-1

Minimum PC Requirements

.................................................................................................................................. 2-2

3-1

File menu descriptions

............................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3-2

3-2

Edit menu descriptions

............................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3-3

3-3

Display menu descriptions

3-4

Inputs menu descriptions

3-5

Design menu descriptions ....................................................................................................................................... 3-7

3-6

Reports menu descriptions

3-7

Tools menu descriptions

....................................................................................................................................... 3-10

3-8

Misc menu descriptions

........................................................................................................................................ 3-10

3-9

Toolbar icon descriptions

3-10

Site icons

3-11

Traffic Icons

3-12

Topology Map pop-up menu ............................................................................................................................... 3-15

3-13

Site pop-up menu

3-14

Link pop-up menu ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17

3-15

Relation pop-up menu

4-1

Edit menu Incremental Design descriptions

4-2

Types of sites

4-3

Edit NE window

4-4

Edit Sites window pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................ 4-21

4-5

Site parameters

4-6

Edit Sites window button actions

4-7

ILA parameters ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-32


4-32

..................................................................................................................................... 3-4

........................................................................................................................................ 3-5

..................................................................................................................................... 3-8

..................................................................................................................................... 3-11

.................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3-13
.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-15
3-15

.................................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3-16

........................................................................................................................................... 3-19
.................................................................................................... 4-6

............................................................................................................................................................ 4-14
4-14
...................................................................................................................................................... 4-19
4-19

......................................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4-21
...................................................................................................................... 4-23

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
ix
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-8

Edit ILAs window pop-up menu

....................................................................................................................... 4-33

4-9

Links table pop-up menu

4-10

Links parameters

4-11

Mixed fiber types with DSF length restriction

4-12

Links table button actions

.................................................................................................................................... 4-41

4-13

Spans table pop-up menu

.................................................................................................................................... 4-42

4-14

Span parameters ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-43


4-43

4-15

Spans table button actions .................................................................................................................................... 4-45

4-16

Relations table pop-up menu

4-17

Working [W] Constraints pop up menu ........................................................................................................... 4-60

4-18

Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu ......................................................................................................... 4-61

4-19

Relations parameters

4-20

Relations table button actions ............................................................................................................................. 4-64

4-21

Services table pop-up menu

4-22

Line View... pop up menu

4-23

Topo Highlight...pop up menu ............................................................................................................................ 4-68

4-24

Working [W] Constraints pop up menu ........................................................................................................... 4-68

4-25

Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu ......................................................................................................... 4-69

4-26

Services parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 4-70


4-70

4-27

Services table button actions ............................................................................................................................... 4-73

4-28

Optical Subset parameters .................................................................................................................................... 4-90


4-90

4-29

Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu

4-30

Optical Subsets table button actions

4-31

Included menu

....................................................................................................................................................... 4-102
4-102

4-32

Excluded menu

...................................................................................................................................................... 4-103
4-103

4-33

Included menu

....................................................................................................................................................... 4-106
4-106

4-34

Excluded menu

...................................................................................................................................................... 4-107
4-107

..................................................................................................................................... 4-38

..................................................................................................................................................... 4-39
4-39
............................................................................................. 4-41

............................................................................................................................. 4-59

.............................................................................................................................................. 4-62
4-62

............................................................................................................................... 4-65

.................................................................................................................................... 4-67

.................................................................................................................. 4-91
................................................................................................................ 4-92

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
x
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-1

Run Full Design icon coloration

.......................................................................................................................... 5-3

6-1

Optical design parameters

6-2

List of reported network design errors

8-1

Board modification status description ................................................................................................................ 8-3

8-2

File menu commands and descriptions .............................................................................................................. 8-8

8-3

Edit menu commands and descriptions

8-4

Display menu commands and descriptions

8-5

NE level menu options

8-6

Rack level menu options

8-7

SubRack level menu options ............................................................................................................................... 8-12

8-8

Ports View pop-up menu

8-9

Ports View window field descriptions

...................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6-4
............................................................................................................ 6-36

............................................................................................................. 8-8
...................................................................................................... 8-9

.......................................................................................................................................... 8-11
...................................................................................................................................... 8-12

...................................................................................................................................... 8-18
............................................................................................................. 8-19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xi
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xii
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of figures
1-1

The ONDP GUI .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-9


1-9

2-1

Installer Welcome window

2-2

InstallShield Wizard window

3-1

File menu

3-2

Edit menu ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3


3-3

3-3

Display menu

3-4

Inputs menu

3-5

Design menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-7


3-7

3-6

Reports menu

3-7

Misc. menu

................................................................................................................................................................ 3-10
3-10

3-8

Misc. menu

................................................................................................................................................................ 3-10
3-10

3-9

Help menu .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-10


3-10

3-10

Help window

3-11

Edge tooltip

3-12

Topology Map Pop menu

3-13

Site pop-up menu

3-14

Link pop-up menu ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17

3-15

Relation pop-up menu

4-1

Init [ONDP] window

4-2

Encrypt ONDP file on saving checkbox

........................................................................................................... 4-5

4-3

Edit menu Incremental Design options

............................................................................................................. 4-6

4-4

Step Slider window

4-5

Edit NE window

..................................................................................................................................... 2-4
................................................................................................................................ 2-6

...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2

.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-4
3-4

................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3-5

.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-8
3-8

............................................................................................................................................................. 3-11
3-11

............................................................................................................................................................... 3-14
3-14
..................................................................................................................................... 3-15

.................................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3-16

........................................................................................................................................... 3-19

................................................................................................................................................ 4-5

................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4-7

...................................................................................................................................................... 4-19
4-19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xiii
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-6

Edit Sites window

................................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4-20

4-7

Edit Sites window pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................ 4-21

4-8

Edit ILAs window ................................................................................................................................................... 4-31


4-31

4-9

Edit ILAs window pop-up menu

4-10

Edit Spans window

4-11

Links table pop-up menu

...................................................................................................................................... 4-38

4-12

Spans table pop-up menu

..................................................................................................................................... 4-42

4-13

Edit Services window

4-14

Relations table pop-up menu

4-15

Topo Highlight... pop up menu

4-16

Working [W] Constraints pop up menu ........................................................................................................... 4-60

4-17

Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu ......................................................................................................... 4-61

4-18

Services table pop-up menu

4-19

Line View... pop up menu

4-20

Topo Highlight... pop up menu

4-21

Working [W] Constraints pop up menu ........................................................................................................... 4-68

4-22

Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu ......................................................................................................... 4-69

4-23

Edit Spectral Constraint window ....................................................................................................................... 4-75

4-24

Set Mutual Disjointness window ....................................................................................................................... 4-77

4-25

Edit Optical Subsets window

4-26

Edit Optical Subsets window pop-up menu

4-27

Edit Subset Mask window

4-28

Edit SRGs window Contents tab ..................................................................................................................... 4-100

4-29

Edit SRGs window Parameters tab

4-30

SRG menu

4-31

Included menu

....................................................................................................................................................... 4-102
4-102

4-32

Excluded menu

...................................................................................................................................................... 4-103
4-103

....................................................................................................................... 4-33

................................................................................................................................................. 4-37
4-37

............................................................................................................................................ 4-58
4-58
.............................................................................................................................. 4-58
.......................................................................................................................... 4-60

................................................................................................................................ 4-65

.................................................................................................................................... 4-67
.......................................................................................................................... 4-68

.............................................................................................................................. 4-89
.................................................................................................. 4-91

................................................................................................................................... 4-95

................................................................................................................ 4-101

............................................................................................................................................................... 4-102
4-102

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xiv
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-33

Transfer buttons ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-104


4-104

4-34

Included menu

....................................................................................................................................................... 4-106
4-106

4-35

Excluded menu

...................................................................................................................................................... 4-107
4-107

4-36

Transfer buttons ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-108


4-108

4-37

Set Design Parameters window

4-38

WDM Layer tab

4-39

Traffic Setting tab

6-1

Edit route optical design window

6-2

Path Feasibility window

6-3

Optical design window

6-4

Dispersion Map window

6-5

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics pop-up menu

6-6

Chart Properties window - Title tab

6-7

Chart Properties window - Plot tab ................................................................................................................... 6-13

6-8

Chart Properties window - Other tab

6-9

Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria 10G

6-10

Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria Mixed 10G/40G

6-11

Spans Count graphical statistics example

...................................................................................................... 6-19

6-12

Access Load graphical statistics example

...................................................................................................... 6-20

6-13

Network Statistics report - General Statistics tab ........................................................................................ 6-22

6-14

Network Statistics report - Statistics on Step tab

6-15

Service Summary button

6-16

Failures Report, Services tab

6-17

Failures Report, Scenarios tab ............................................................................................................................ 6-27

6-18

Failures Report, Filter tab

6-19

GMRE Audit Logs report determining success of GMPLS dimensioning

6-20

GMRE Audit Logs report evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning ................ 6-33

....................................................................................................................... 4-116

.................................................................................................................................................... 4-117
4-117
................................................................................................................................................. 4-122
4-122
........................................................................................................................ 6-4

.......................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6-7

............................................................................................................................................ 6-8
6-8
......................................................................................................................................... 6-9
....................................................................... 6-10

................................................................................................................. 6-12

............................................................................................................... 6-14
..................................................................................................... 6-16
............................................................................. 6-16

........................................................................................ 6-23

...................................................................................................................................... 6-24
.............................................................................................................................. 6-26

.................................................................................................................................... 6-29
.................................. 6-32

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xv
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-21

Traffic design logs report

..................................................................................................................................... 6-34

6-22

List Errors report

6-23

Bill of Material report ............................................................................................................................................ 6-37


6-37

6-24

Incremental Bill of Material report ................................................................................................................... 6-38

6-25

Part List report .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-39


6-39

6-26

Edit Equipments report

6-27

Show Line View Display options

...................................................................................................................... 6-42

6-28

Line View (full spectrum) report

....................................................................................................................... 6-43

6-29

Line View (optimized) report

6-30

Excel Export Filtering window

6-31

Descriptive Sheet tab

6-32

Map tab

6-33

Sites tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-50


6-50

6-34

Links tab

6-35

Relations tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-52


6-52

6-36

BOM tab

6-37

Part List Sites tab

6-38

Design Service Summary tab .............................................................................................................................. 6-55

6-39

Restoration tab

6-40

Graph Statistics tab ................................................................................................................................................. 6-57


6-57

6-41

Inter-NE Links, LT and Node tab

6-42

NE Parameters tab

6-43

Subsets tab

6-44

GMPLS Link Optical Parameters tab

6-45

GMPLS AddDropType per Site

6-46

SRG tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-63


6-63

6-47

Network Design Logs tab

..................................................................................................................................................... 6-35
6-35

......................................................................................................................................... 6-40

............................................................................................................................. 6-44
.......................................................................................................................... 6-45

............................................................................................................................................. 6-48
6-48

....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-49
6-49

..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-51
6-51

..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-53
6-53
.................................................................................................................................................... 6-54
6-54

......................................................................................................................................................... 6-56
6-56

...................................................................................................................... 6-58

.................................................................................................................................................. 6-59
6-59

................................................................................................................................................................. 6-60
6-60
.............................................................................................................. 6-61

......................................................................................................................... 6-62

.................................................................................................................................... 6-64

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xvi
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-48

OSNR NLP tab ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-65


6-65

6-49

CD tab

6-50

PL Site X tab

6-51

SP Site-X Site-X tab ............................................................................................................................................... 6-68


6-68

6-52

Ser Site-X Site-X ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-69


6-69

6-53

DSF Mask 2 Forghieri grids tab

6-54

Export BoM report .................................................................................................................................................. 6-72


6-72

8-1

Add/Drop boards directions and sides

8-2

Edit Equipments window ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7

8-3

Edit Equipments window File menu

.................................................................................................................. 8-8

8-4

Edit Equipments window Edit menu

.................................................................................................................. 8-8

8-5

Edit Equipments window Display menu ........................................................................................................... 8-9

8-6

Left navigation tree

8-7

NE level menu

8-8

Rack level menu

8-9

SubRack level menu ............................................................................................................................................... 8-12


8-12

8-10

Edit Equipments window Main panel

8-11

Edit Equipments window menu - all boards except concentrators

8-12

Edit Equipments window menu - concentrators

8-13

Ports View window - Example 1

....................................................................................................................... 8-16

8-14

Ports View window - Example 2

....................................................................................................................... 8-17

8-15

Ports View pop-up menu

9-1

Map Calibration - Step 1 window

....................................................................................................................... 9-3

9-2

Map Calibration - Step 2 window

....................................................................................................................... 9-3

9-3

Map Calibration - Step 3 window

....................................................................................................................... 9-4

9-4

Map Calibration - Step 5 window

....................................................................................................................... 9-6

......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-66
6-66
............................................................................................................................................................. 6-67
6-67

........................................................................................................................ 6-70

............................................................................................................... 8-4

................................................................................................................................................ 8-10
8-10

.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8-11
...................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8-11

............................................................................................................. 8-13
....................................................... 8-13

.......................................................................................... 8-14

...................................................................................................................................... 8-18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xvii
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xviii
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

About this document


About this document

Purpose

The Alcatel-Lucent Optical Network Design Platform User Guide (ONDP) provides a
detailed description of the Optical Network Design Platform User Guide (ONDP)
application and how to use it for network design.
Intended audience

ONDP users are Customer Capacity Planning Organizations, Customer Route Planners,
Customer and Alcatel-Lucent Network Designers. They will use this tool to design the
network equipment configurations and to design traffic services through the network.
In summary, this guide is intended for individuals responsible for:

network designs
pre-sales technical support and engineering

technical support
customer capacity planning organizations
customer route planners

How to use this information product

This guide is divided into the following chapters. Refer to the Contents section to locate
specific information by chapter.
Chapter

Description

Chapter 1, Introduction

Describes the Optical Network Design Platform User


Guide (ONDP) features and functionality.

Chapter 2, Installation and Startup

Provides information on how to install, uninstall,


launch, and exit the ONDP application.

Chapter 3, ONDP User Interface

Provides information about the ONDP user interface.

Chapter 4, Design Inputs

Provides information on inputs used to design and


plan a network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xix
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

About this document


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Chapter

Description

Chapter 5, Run the Network Design

Provides information on how to run the network


design.

Chapter 6, Design Results

Provides information on how to retrieve and view


network design result and reports.

Chapter 7, Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Provides information on performing network analysis


operations on an existing network.

Chapter 8, Modifications for ONDP Design

Provides information on modifying shelves and


concentrator ports after running the ONDP design.

Chapter 9, Map Management

Provides information on how to generate a new


default background map for the ONDP application

Glossary

Provides a list of common terms and acronyms

Related documents

Alcatel-Lucent also provides the following documents to support the 1626 Light Manager
equipment:
DOCUMENT TYPE

PRT NUMBER

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Product


Information and Planning Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-AAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager User


Provisioning Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-BAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager


Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide;
Release 7.0

3AL-75223-FAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Quick


Reference Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-GAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Safety


Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-HAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager System


Turn-Up Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-JAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager TL1


Command Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-KAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager


Installation Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-LAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager


GMPLS/GMRE Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-PAAA-TQZZA

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xx
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

About this document


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DOCUMENT TYPE

PRT NUMBER

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Optical


Network Design Platform (ONDP) User
Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Optical


Network Design Platform (ONDP) Installation
Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-SAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Data


Communication Network (DCN) Planning
Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-TAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Customer


Documentation Collection; Release 7.0

3AL-75224-AAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Optical


Network Design Platform (ONDP) Customer
Documentation Collection; Release 7.0

3AL-75226-AAAA

Related training

Alcatel-Lucent University provides courses to train telecommunication technicians in


installation, operations, and maintenance personnel. Contact Alcatel-Lucent at
1-888-582-3688 to enroll in training classes.
Technical support

For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the web
at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support or through the telephone number listed under the
Technical Assistance Center menu at https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do
(https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do).
How to order

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS): (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xxi
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

About this document


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality policy

We ensure that everything we do must be focused on becoming the trusted partner of our
customers by:

Delivering high quality, secure and reliable products, services, software and solutions
the first time, every time, and on time - as promised.
Continuously making improvements and looking for innovative ways to anticipate
and fully meet the highest expectations of our customers.
Counting on all employees to be personally accountable for putting the customer first
and honoring the commitments we make.

This policy will be regularly reviewed, updated as necessary, applied and communicated
to all employees and persons working for or on behalf of Alcatel-Lucent, and made
available to interested parties and the public.
How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
xxii
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction
1

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the features and functionality.


Contents
Features

1-2

Functionality

1-8

The ONDP Interface

1-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Features
Overview

ONDP is a software application that operates on a windows-based platform. ONDP is the


Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT) of the 1626LM.
ONDP is used to optimize networks, considering 1626LM product specifications and
optical parameters for the WDM transport layer.
GUI features

The following is a list of the ONDP GUI features.

A user-friendly GUI provides a network topology view


Automatic updates of user inputs to keep the overall display interface coherency
A copy and paste functionality which allows internal or external information to be
moved to or from an Excel spreadsheet.

An undo/redo functionality
A smart NE functionality, where the NE type is automatically determined from its
connectivity
A zoom functionality adjusts the Map scale
A visualization of the planning tool status informs the user when a new design is
needed
A display of interactive charts for optical design results
A graphical gauge displays the optical feasibility of the link
A display of design results which provides surface based views of network statistics
on graphical objects (nodes and links)

A graphical highlight of routing results


A display of wavelength paths in the network
A Map Generation tool imports, calibrates, and manipulates the Network Map
A display of failure simulation analysis for restoration design or audit

Network optimization and design features

The following list is a summary of the ONDP network optimization features.

Provides a rich optimization algorithm for multi-fiber networks which allow finer
WDM line tuning, dispersion mapping optimization, and amplifier settings
optimization. This algorithm uses 1626LM components performance.
Provides a constraint-based routing & optical transparency optimization algorithm.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provides a regeneration and recoloration optimization algorithm for wavelength


allocation. This cost-based algorithm minimizes resource usage and maximizes
transparency as well as fiber filling. The algorithm considers product constraints such
as loading plan and NE architecture.

Contains a failure simulator for protection assessment and restoration.


Generates and exports a Network Design Table (NDT). The table, which contains a
full network description (topology and traffic matrix, configuration, and parameter
settings) is exported in .xml format.
Provides a shelf definition following 1626LM recommendations. Contains a Shelf
Equipment View and Editor for racks, shelves, and boards with the same look and feel
as the network manager.
Generates Bills of Materials and Part Lists for network quotation. The Bill of
Materials contains a simple and detailed part list, as well as a full equipment
inventory based on Alcatel-Lucent reference numbers for all boards & accessories.

Provides an enhanced global optimization RWA algorithm that enables the user to
reach pseudo-optimal solutions.

R5.0B features

The following is a list of the major features included in R5.0B.

Support of designs with 40-G DPSK and PDPSK


Support of designs with Line Terminal + ILA + B-OADM + R-OADM (WB)
Support of designs with R-OADM (WSS) nodes up to degree-8
Support of designs on transmission sections (OTS) with mixed fiber types on the
different spans
NE Configuration Management - provides the ability to specify the default system
architecture for new projects and to modify NE type inside an existing project.
Map Generation - provides the ability to generate and calibrate user background
maps.

R6.0 features

The following are the major features included in R6.0.

Support of multidirectional OADM


Support of failure analysis
Support of restoration

Support of PRC and SBR services


Support of incremental design
Support of designs with T-OADM nodes up to degree-8

Support of mixed NEs with multidirectional and fixed A/D


Support of 10-G MLSE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Support of 40-G PDPSK EFEC


Support of new functionalities for Automatic Line Commissioning through SPLM
Support of a new Excel file export summarizing the outputs

Support of migration from ONDP R5.0B to R6.0

R6.0A Features

The following are the major features in R6.0A

Support of 40-G coherent second-generation services with new Enhanced FEC format
Support of mixed Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) and DCF applications FBG are used
for long spans
Support of Optical Sub Network Connection Protection (ONSCP) non-revertive
Support of 40-G P-DPSK pre-filtering design

Support of long span design with double amplifiers in 2 NEs


Support of symmetrical double repeater design
Support of FBG DCM (SMF and E-Leaf) for spans more than 100 km

R6.1 Features

The following are the major features in R6.1:

ONDP Audit provides the ability to audit and analyze an existing network. The
analysis is based on user-specified design modes and constraints on resources.
Analysis is performed on full network or selected objects and results are viewed in
ONDP tools and reports.
ONDP Upgrade provides the ability to add new resources or modify existing
resources and perform an upgrade design on an existing network, using specified
constraints
Support of TR2D1191 10-G NRZ transponder
Support of double LOFA1 (symmetrical or asymmetrical) in all Terminal, X-OADM,
and Repeater configurations
Support of R-OADM up to degree 8 with WMAN9 and OCNC1280 configurations
Support of directionless T-OADM up to degree 8 with WMAN9 and OCNC1290
configurations

Support of multidrectional block based on WMAN9 and TDMX


Support of Repeater PGE configurations (WMAN1 based)
Support of Repeater AGE configurations (WMAN9 based) with ALC

Support of fast restoration configurations


Support of user choice of Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM) used for spans.
Choices are: Full DCF, Full FBG or Mixed DCF and FBG

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R7.0 Features

The following are the major features in R7.0:

Support of the following 100 G transponder and concentrator boards:


112SCA1 - 100Gb/s coherent transponder, NRZ PDM-QPSK modulation format
with EFEC, with CFP module at client side, and embedded ROFA on Tx side;
50GHz grid
112SCX10 - coherent 10x10Gb/s concentrator in 100Gb/s, NRZ PDM-QPSK with
EFEC, with XFP at client side and embedded ROFA on Tx side; 50GHz grid.

112SX10U - coherent 10x10Gb/s concentrator in 100Gb/s, NRZ PDM-QPSK


with EFEC, with XFP at client side, 1 UDC at 10Mbits and embedded ROFA on
Tx side; 50GHz grid
Support of the following 40 G transponder and concentrator boards:
TRBC4616 P-DPSK with new Enhanced FEC (only one TDCM) )

TRBC4716 NRZ PDM-BPSK with new Enhanced FEC format with XFP on client
side, optional Tx PCDC; 50GHz grid
Support of 1830PSS PSS32 shelf for 100G transponders
Support of RSA-ETSI ONERACK with MANGTRU

Support of 1830PSS Equipment Controller used as Second Level Controller in


1626LM
Support of FAN32H - high power dissipation unit
Support of cascade of concentrators, (2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)
connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side). OSNCP protection is supported in this
configuration
Support of TRBC1191 - 50 GHz: 4 x 2.5G concentrator, NRZ, pluggabe client, no
PCDC
Support of the following below 2.5G clients mapped into 2.5G or 10G:
STM16, CBR 2.5G on TRBC1x9z
Support of the following 40G clients mapped into 40G
OTU3 on TRBD4xy6 (NNI at 43.0 GBps)
Support of the following 10G clients mapped into 40G:
STM64, OC192, 10GbEWAN, and CBR10G on TRBC4xyz boards
Mix of any 10G format supported on TRBC4x16 boards
10GbELAN supported on TRBC4xyz boards (GFP-F mapping)
OTU2 supported on TRBC4xy6 boards (NNI at 10.7 Gbps)
Support of the following 10G clients mapped into 100G:
STM64, OC192, 10GbELAN, CBR10G on 100 G concentrator
10 GbELAN on 100G concentrator (bit transparent mapping) Use GMP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OTU2 on 100G concentrator (NNI at 10.7 Gbps) Use GMP


OTU2e on 100G concentrator (NNI at 11.1 Gbps) Use GMP
Support of the following 100G clients mapped into 100G:
100GbELAN via GMP on 112SCA1
OTU4 signal regeneration with 112SCX10 for transmission by 112SCA1 or
112SCX10
OTU4 signal regeneration with 112SC10U for transmission by 112SC10U
Automatic design with ONDP and GMPLS impacts:
Mix of two modulation formats: 10G (TRB1191 non-coherent/100Gb coherent
Mix of two modulation formats: 40G non-coherent (TRB4616) and 100G
coherent

Mix of two modulation formats: 40G coherent (TRB4617) and 100 G coherent
Mix of two modulation formats: 100G coherent (112SX10U) and 100G coherent
(112SCA1 or 112SCX10)
DCM free with LOFA1 and coherent transponders

100G coherent in DCU managed network (112SX10U)


GMPLS - Most disjoint service: ONDP alignment with respect to 1626LM R7.0
GMRE
GMPLS - Wavelength reuse: ONDP alignment with respect to 1626LM R7.0
GMRE
Management of ASE (Amplify Spontaneous Emission) noise inducing A/D penalties
with respect to node Optical architecture: Step1:
For nominal routes, complete OSNR calculation including A/D penalties
For restoration routes, application of constant penalties
OSNCP protection based on OCPU board place in1626LM generic shelf and 100 G
coherent board hosted in PSS32 shelf: 112SX10U and 112SCA1
Alarm for amplifier gain out of range Amplifier gain minimum and maximum
parameters are provided to detect the variation of the amplifier gain outside of a
planned range.
End to end service grooming grooming of services can be done from source to
destination based on the concentrators managed: TRBC4616, TRBC4716, and ETHC.
Favor or forbid manual definition of regeneration site during automatic design, the
user can favor a site to receive regeneration, if needed, or forbid a site to receive
regeneration. It is also possible to add a regeneration site.
Management of number of OMS channels the user is able to improve performance
by setting different maximum number of OMS channels for subsets
User name assignment for OMS, OTS, and local OTS.
Network design including G653 Dispersion Shifted Fibers (DSF)
ILA site names management also applies to bypass sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Multidirectional Add/Drop block differentiation for services


Manual modification of shelves by the user after running the design is supported. This
is applicable on all sites except ILA and bypass sites. These modifications are
accepted by ONDP without checks.
Incremental design step view based on services.
Encryption of the .ONDP file
ONDP read-only version

Network Description Table (NDT) generation for the entire network


Statistic tool providing the number of NEs and the number of OMSs in a network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

Functionality

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Functionality
Network size

The following describes the network design capacity of ONDP.

500 NEs
1000 Links
100 Relations

Design options

ONDP supports the greenfield and brownfield design of based networks. The user can
create and configure a network in a variety of ways.

Begin the network design from scratch


Copy and paste external network design information from an Excel spreadsheet

Load a saved ONDP design file from another user

Both external and initial configurations contain the following network design element
data, which can be edited:

Site (which contains only one NE in this release)


Link

Spans
Traffic matrix

In engineering and planning the network design, the following options can be configured:

WDM layer
Packet layer
Optimization setting
Results

Results options

The design results are displayed either graphically, in table format or in a log format.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

The ONDP Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The ONDP Interface


The ONDP GUI

The ONDP GUI provides a user-friendly interface to enter data and gives easy access to
the full functionality of the tool. The following is an illustration of the ONDP GUI. The
associated windows and tasks are described later in this document.
Figure 1-1 The ONDP GUI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Introduction

The ONDP Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
1-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup


2

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to install, uninstall, launch, and exit the ONDP
application.
Contents
Installation Requirements

2-2

Installer Welcome Window

2-4

InstallShield Wizard Window

2-6

Install ONDP

2-7

Update ONDP Version

2-10

Uninstall ONDP

2-12

Launch ONDP

2-13

Close ONDP

2-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Installation Requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Installation Requirements
Hardware and software requirements

ONDP is distributed via download. Your Alcatel-Lucent ONDP representative will supply
you with details on how to obtain the software. All required software is included in the
installation. The following hardware and software are required on the PC before you
begin installing the ONDP application.
Table 2-1

Minimum PC Requirements

Processor

Pentium IV 2.8 GHz

RAM

1 Gb

Operating System

Windows XP

Java Version

Version 6 Build 1.6

Check/Update Java Version

To check the Java version installed on your PC follow this path: Start > Settings >
Control Panel > Java > General > About...

To update the Java version installed on your PC, follow this path: Start > Settings >
Control Panel > Java > Update > Update Now
License key

The following are the types of license keys supported by ONDP.

Client - provides access privileges for most of the system. Expert fields are excluded
from view.
Bidder - provides access privileges for most of the system.
Expert - provides access privileges to the entire system
Read-only - provides viewing privileges, but design and topology changes are not

allowed
To start ONDP successfully, you must install the license key. Use the following process to
obtain a license key and install the license key on your PC.

Install ONDP on the PC. For more information see the Install ONDP (p. 2-7) task.
Once installed, launch the ONDP application. For more information, see the Launch
ONDP (p. 2-13) task.
The ONDP application supplies a code, which you send to your Alcatel-Lucent ONDP
representative.
The Alcatel-Lucent ONDP representative returns a License.ondp file, which you copy
into the ONDP folder using this path:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Installation Requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C:/Program Files/<ONDP Installation Directory>/ONDP X.X (where X.X is the

release number).
Using this process, the ONDP application will launch successfully.
Troubleshooting the installation

In order for the ONDP installation to be successful, the folder ONDP_shared_components must be installed in the C:/Program Files folder. Users who install the ONDP
application in a folder other than C:/Program Files must create a folder named
C:/Program Files and copy the ONDP_shared_components folder into it. Using a folder
other than C:/Program Files usually applies to users whose PC language is other than
English.
Example:

On a PC for which the language is Italian, the ONDP application is installed in the
C:/Programmi folder. This user must create a folder located under C:/ called Program
Files. The user must then copy the ONDP_shared_components folder from the
C:/Programmi folder into the C:/Program Files folder.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Installer Welcome Window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Installer Welcome Window


Installer Welcome window

Upon initial installation of the ONDP software, the Installer Welcome window is
displayed.
Figure 2-1 Installer Welcome window

The Installer Welcome window has the following options:

Install - click this option to install the ONDP application. For more information on the

installation process see Install ONDP (p. 2-7).


View - click this option to view the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Optical
Network Design Platform (ONDP) Installation Guide; Release 7.0
View User Guide - click this option to view the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager
Optical Network Design Platform (ONDP) User Guide; Release 7.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Installer Welcome Window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View SRD - click this option to view the Software Release Description (SRD), which

is a summary of the software release features.


Exit - click this option to exit the installation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

InstallShield Wizard Window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

InstallShield Wizard Window


InstallShield Wizard window

The ONDP InstallShield Wizard window contains the following options to facilitate
ONDP software maintenance.

Modify - use this option when installing new components of ONDP

Repair - use this option when updating the ONDP version. For more information, see

Update ONDP Version (p. 2-10).

Remove - use this option when ONDP is uninstalled. For more information, see

Uninstall ONDP (p. 2-12).


Figure 2-2 InstallShield Wizard window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Install ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install ONDP
When to use

Use this task to install ONDP on the PC.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Installation Requirements (p. 2-2)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to install ONDP.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Download the iso file. This iso file will be the virtual CD-ROM.
ONDP is distributed via a downloaded iso file. Your Alcatel-Lucent ONDP representative
will supply you with details on how to obtain this file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following to start the installer:

If your PC is configured to run automatically from the CD-ROM drive, the


InstallShield wizard automatically starts.
Result: The Installer Welcome window is displayed. Move to Step 3.
If your PC is not configured to run automatically, do one of the following:
From the Windows Start
menu, select Start > Run

To display the Installer


Welcome window, browse to
locate and run the setup file:
<CD-ROM
drive>/ONDPInstall.exe

The Installer Welcome


window is displayed. Move
to Step 3.

To skip the Installer


Welcome window, browse to
locate and run the setup file:
<CD-ROM drive>/Setup.exe

The License Agreement


Terms window is displayed.
Move to Step 4.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Install ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the <ONDP


Installation Directory>/

To display the Installer


Welcome window,
double-click
ONDPInstall.exe

The Installer Welcome


window is displayed. Move
to Step 3.

To skip the Installer


Welcome window,
double-click Setup.exe

The License Agreement


Terms window is displayed.
Move to Step 4.

Note: The Installer Welcome window contains options to view the User Guide or
SRD. For information on the Installer Welcome window, see Installer Welcome
Window (p. 2-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Installer Welcome window, click the Install option to initiate the installation
process.
Result: The License Agreement Terms window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Yes button to accept the terms of the license agreement.
Result: The installation notes are displayed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Read the installation notes and then click the Next button.
Result: The Installation Directory window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To specify an installation directory, do one of the following:

To accept the default directory, click the Next button.

To use a different directory, enter the directory name or browse to select a directory,
and then click the Next button.
Result: The Start menu configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To specify a program folder in the Start menu, do one of the following:

To accept the default folder, click the Next button.

To use a different directory, enter the directory name or browse to select a directory,
and then click the Next button.
Result: The Installation Summary window displays the products to be installed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Next button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Install ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Installation Summary window displays the installation progress.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When the installation is complete, click the Finish button.


Result: ONDP is installed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Update ONDP Version

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update ONDP Version


When to use

Use this task to update the version of ONDP from the version currently installed on the
PC.
When you load the update version on your PC, an executable file is loaded in this format:
ONDP_X_X_build_nn_installer_dd_mm_yyyy.exe. X_X is the release number, and nn is
the version number within the release.
Before you begin

Before you begin this task, ONDP must be installed on the PC, and you must obtain the
upgrade software and load it on the PC. Upgrades are provided by your Alcatel-Lucent
representative. You will receive instructions on how to load the upgrade.
Note: To verify that the version is updated after completion of this task, view and
compare the current version of ONDP in the Help option on the Main menu.
Task

Complete the following steps to update the ONDP version.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the instructions provided by your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support
team, to load the ONDP update on your PC.
Result: The update software is loaded.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Browse to the ONDP update executable file ONDP_X_X_build_nn_installer_dd_mm_yyyy.exe and run the file.
Result: The ONDP InstallShield Wizard screen is displayed, indicating the installation

progress.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

At the ONDP InstallShield Wizard Window (p. 2-6), select Repair and click the Next
button.
Inportant: Always use the Repair option to ensure that the ONDP version is updated

correctly.
Result: The InstallShield Wizard Set up Status is displayed and when the version
update is complete the message Maintenance Complete is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Finish.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Update ONDP Version

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The ONDP version update is complete.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-11
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Uninstall ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Uninstall ONDP
When to use

Use this task to uninstall ONDP from the PC.


Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to uninstall ONDP.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the PC Start menu, select Programs > Alcatel-Lucent > ONDP X.X > Uninstall
ONDP X.X. (where X.X is the release number)
Result: The InstallShield Wizard window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the InstallShield Wizard window, select the Remove option button and then click
the Next button.
Result: The Confirm File Deletion box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK.
Result: The uninstall process is started, and a confirmation box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Finish.
Result: ONDP is uninstalled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-12
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Launch ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Launch ONDP
When to use

Use this task to launch the ONDP application on the PC.


Before you begin

Before you begin this procedure, ensure that the ONDP application is installed on the PC,
and the ONDP icon appears on the desktop.
Task

Complete the following steps to launch the ONDP application on the PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

Double click the ONDP X.X icon on the PC desktop. (where X.X is the release
number)

From the PC Start menu, select Programs > Alcatel-Lucent > ONDP X.X >
ONDP.exe. (where X.X is the release number)
Note: Alcatel-Lucent is the default installation folder. If you have created another
folder under which ONDP is installed, use that path to locate the ondp.exe file.
Result: The ONDP main window is displayed.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-13
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Installation and Startup

Close ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close ONDP
When to use

Use this task to close the ONDP application on the PC.


Before you begin

Before you begin this procedure, ensure that the ONDP application is installed on the PC,
and configuration changes are saved prior to closing the application.
Task

Complete the following steps to close the ONDP application on the PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:


If...

Then...

You want to save all configuration changes to


the existing file

Select File > Save. Changes are saved to the


current project
Select File > Exit

You want to save all configuration changes to


a new file

Select File > Save As

You do not want to save any configuration


changes

Select File > Exit

A window is displayed where you can name


the file and place it in the desired directory.
A Warning box is displayed, which warns that
modifications are detected and will be lost.
Click Continue

Result: The ONDP application is closed.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
2-14
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface


3

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information about the ONDP user interface.


Contents
Main Menu and Toolbar
Map Legend

3-2
3-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Main Menu and Toolbar


Overview

Network design can be accomplished by using the ONDP menus, toolbar, and associated
windows. The following sections describe the Main menu and toolbar.
The Main menu

The Main menu contains the following options:

File
Edit
Display
Inputs

Design
Reports
Tools
Misc.

Help

File menu
Figure 3-1 File menu

Table 3-1

File menu descriptions

File menu command

Description

New Project

Create a new design project

Open Project

Open an existing design project

Save

Save the current design to a default file name

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-1

File menu descriptions

(continued)

File menu command

Description

Save As

Save the current design to a designated file name and


location

Encrypt ONDP file on saving

Click the checkbox to encrypt the .ondp file while saving.


To deactivate the encryption, uncheck the checkbox while
saving the .ondp file. For more information, see ONDP
project file encryption (p. 4-5)

Exit

Close ONDP and exit the application

Edit menu
Figure 3-2 Edit menu

Table 3-2

Edit menu descriptions

Edit menu command

Description

Undo

Undo the last action performed

Redo

Redo the last action that was undone

Delete Selected

Remove the selected items

Select All

Select all items in the Topology Map

Clear All

Clear all previously selected items

Invert Selection

Reverse the status of selection of all the items on the map.


Those items in the selected state are cleared and items in
the cleared state are selected.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-2

Edit menu descriptions

(continued)

Edit menu command

Description

Highlight All Selected

Highlight the selected items on the Map.

Insert Step After Current One

Stop the current design step and begin the next step in the
incremental design. For more information on Incremental
Design, see Incremental Design (p. 4-6).

Delete Current Step

Delete all resources added during the current step in the


incremental design. For more information on Incremental
Design, see Incremental Design (p. 4-6).

Highlight Current Step

Highlight all resources added during the current step in the


incremental design on the Topology map. For more
information on Incremental Design, see Incremental
Design (p. 4-6).

Display menu
Figure 3-3 Display menu

Table 3-3

Display menu descriptions

Display menu command

Description

Display NE Sites

Display/hide NE sites on the Topology map

Display xGE Sites

Display/hide xGE sites on the Topology map

Display Labels

Display/hide labels on the Topology map

Display Links

Display/hide links on the Topology map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-3

Display menu descriptions

(continued)

Display menu command

Description

Display Relations

Display/hide relations on the Topology map

Display Map

Display/hide the background map.

Display Edge Tooltips

Display/hide the Edge Tooltip for links and relations on the


Topology Map. For more information, see Edge Tooltip
(p. 3-14)

Use Large Icons

Display elements on the Topology map using largest size


icons

Use Medium Icons

Display elements on the Topology map using the medium


size icons

Use Small Icons

Display elements on the Topology map using the smallest


size icons

Inputs menu
Figure 3-4 Inputs menu

Table 3-4

Inputs menu descriptions

Inputs menu command

Description

Edit Sites

Open the Edit Sites window to edit Site properties. For


more information, see Section 2: Sites (p. 4-13)

Edit ILAs

Open the Edit ILAs window to edit ILA properties. For


more information, see Section 3: ILAs (p. 4-30).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-4

Inputs menu descriptions

(continued)

Inputs menu command

Description

Edit Links/Spans

Open the Edit Spans window to edit Links and Spans to set
physical link properties. For more information, see Section
4: Links and Spans (p. 4-36)

Edit Relations/Services

Open the Edit Services window to edit Relations and


Services logical link properties. For more information, see
Section 5: Relations and Services (p. 4-56)

Edit Optical Subsets

Open the Optical Subsets window to create and edit Optical


Subset properties. For more information, see Section 6:
Optical Subsets (p. 4-88)

Edit SRGs

Open the Edit SRGs window to edit Shared Risk Groups.


For more information, see Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)
(p. 4-99)

Automatic Failure Scope

A check in the check box indicates all failure analysis is


done by ONDP based on link and SRG failures only.
Multidirect Add/Drop blocks and Sites are excluded. When
the checkbox is cleared, the Edit Failure Scope command
becomes available for selection, and the failure scope can
be manually defined.

Edit Failure Scope

Open the Failures Scope window. This command is


available for selection when the Automatic Failure Scope
command is unchecked. For more information, see
Failures Scope (p. 4-105)

Set Design Parameters

Open the Design Parameters window to set the network


design configuration parameters. For more information, see
Section 8: Design Parameters (p. 4-114)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Design menu
Figure 3-5 Design menu

Table 3-5

Design menu descriptions

Design menu command

Description

Run Full Design [Links + Traffic]

Run the full design and produce a network according to the


specified design elements and network design configuration
parameters. This command is the shortcut to run the links
design followed by a traffic design. For more information,
see The Network Design (p. 5-2).

Run Full Links Design only

Run a partial design to optimize optical parameters such as


amplifier position, dispersion mapping optimization, and
amplifier type settings optimization. For more information,
see The Network Design (p. 5-2).

Run Full Traffic Design only

Run a partial design to resolve the traffic matrix. Performs a


wavelength allocation, a dimensioning, and a shelf
computation. This operation is only possible if a links
design has been previously triggered. For more
information, see The Network Design (p. 5-2).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reports menu
Figure 3-6 Reports menu

Table 3-6

Reports menu descriptions

Reports menu command

Description

Show/Tune Selected Links Design

Open the Edit route optical design window for selected


links which displays the results of the design. For more
information, see Show/Tune Selected Links Design
(p. 6-3)

Show Selected Links Physical


Diagnostics

Open the Optical design window for the selected links,


which displays the optical design analysis in graphical
format. For more information, see Show Selected Links
Physical Diagnostics (p. 6-6)

Show Selected Links Real-Time


Fast Feasibility Criteria

Open a graphical representation of the optical feasibility


of selected links between nodes. For more information,
see Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility
Criteria (p. 6-15)

Show Graphical Statistics

Open the Statistics window which enables the ability to


show design results for Sites and Links graphically on the
Topology map. For more information, see Show
Graphical Statistics (p. 6-17)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-6

Reports menu descriptions

(continued)

Reports menu command

Description

Show Network Statistics

Open the Network Statistics window which displays high


level statistical values of the network design optimization.
For more information, see Show Network Statistics
(p. 6-21).

Show Failures Report

Open the Failures Report window which shows what


happens to services when a failure on a node/link occurs,
reported as Dead, Restored or not affected. For more
information, see Show Failures Report (p. 6-24).

Show GMRE Audit Logs

Open the GMRE Audit Logs window which displays the


results of the restoration and protection analysis/failure
analysis. For more information, see Show GMRE Audit
Logs (p. 6-31).

Show Traffic Design Logs

Open the Traffic design logs window which displays logs


on the network design. For more information, see Show
Traffic Design Logs (p. 6-34)

Show Errors Report

Open the List Errors window which provides information


about warning messages and errors generated during the
network design. For more information, see Show Errors
Report (p. 6-35)

Show Bill of Material

Open the Bill of Materials which displays a list of


materials needed to construct the network. For more
information, see Show Bill of Material (p. 6-37)

Show Bill of Material (multi-step)

Open the Incremental Bill of Material window, which


displays the list of materials needed to construct the
network for each step in the incremental design.

Show Sites/Part List

Open the detailed Part List window which displays the


board list with details such as board location and optical
parameters. For more information, see Show Sites/Part
List (p. 6-39)

Export Design Results Excel


Report

Open the Excel Export Filtering window to select options


to include in an Excel spreadsheet, and then export the
Excel file of the design results. The report also contains
information about optical design parameters. For more
information, see Export Design Results Excel Report
(p. 6-45)

Export BoM

Produce output to Comet software for automatic quotation


based on BoM. For more information, see Export BoM
(p. 6-71)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tools menu
Figure 3-7 Misc. menu

Table 3-7

Tools menu descriptions

Tools menu command

Description

GMRE Simulator

Run the GMRE audit, which produces results of restoration


and protection analysis/failure analysis/dimensioning of the
network.

Misc. menu
Figure 3-8 Misc. menu

Table 3-8

Misc menu descriptions

Misc. menu command

Description

Product Database

Displays commands related to the product database import


and export functions.

Help menu
Figure 3-9 Help menu

The Help menu contains the About option, which displays information about the installed
ONDP software.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-10 Help window

The Toolbar

The ONDP main window toolbar provides tools to create/edit/interrogate the network.
Table 3-9
Tool tip

Toolbar icon descriptions


Icon

Description

New Project

Create a new design

Open Project

Open a saved design

Save

Save the current design

Save As

Save the current design to a designated file name and


location

Undo

Undo the last action performed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-11
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-9

Toolbar icon descriptions

Tool tip

Icon

(continued)

Description

Redo

Redo the last action that was undone

Delete Selected

Remove the selected items

Scale 1:1

Show the network to scale on the Topology Map

Fit to Contents

Show the entire network on the Topology Map,


regardless of scale

Select

Activate the cursor to select a design element and


deactivate the creation mode

Create Default NE

Create an NE at the insertion point with the default


architecture that was specified when creating the
project

Create 3R

Create a regeneration site at the insertion point

Create Link

Create a link (a sequence of fiber spans) to connect one


site to another. Each link contains at least one fiber
span.

Create Relation

Create a relation (which supports a set of service


demands) between two sites. By default, a relation
contains no service.

Run Full Design

Run the full analysis on the network design

Show Graphical
Statistics

Open the Graphical Statistics window to display the


results of the network design in graphical format

Optical Margin Tool

Display the optical margin available for the set of


selected links

Show Step Slider

Display the current step in the Step Slider window.


This window allows the Topology map to display the
resources in the previous or next step in the
Incremental Design. For more information, see
Incremental Design (p. 4-6).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-12
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Map Legend
Overview

The Topology map contains icons that represent and facilitate the network design.
Site icons

The following table describes the types of site icons, which contain Network Elements
(NEs). The site icon displays information about the architecture, connectivity, and name
of the NE. For a detailed description on types of sites and NE architecture, see Section 2:
Sites (p. 4-13).
Table 3-10
Site icon

Site icons
Description
Undefined NE site. A site which contains only one NE.
This NE is not connected to the network.

Terminal site. A site which contains only one NE. This


NE is a fixed NE and is only connected by one link to the
network. This site is opaque.

OADM site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE


is an R-OADM and can have multiple connections to the
network. This site is transparent.

OADM site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE


is a multidirectional NE. The maximum degree of the NE
is 5.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-13
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-10

Site icons

(continued)

Site icon

Description
3R site. A site which contains only regenerators. This NE
is a fixed NE and is connected by two links to the
network. This site is opaque.

ILA AGE site. A site which contains only one NE. This
NE is connected by two links and is used to correct the
wavelengths tilt. This site is transparent. A user is not
able to create the ILA AGE site. This type of site is
automatically inserted during the links design step.
PGE site when designing APA networks. In this case,
utilize a point to point network with fixed nodes
containing 16 spans.

Edge Tooltip

The Edge tooltip appears by holding the cursor over a link or relation. The information
displayed in the Edge tooltip describes the source and destination of the link/relation. This
information is useful when the entire Topology map is not in view. Additionally, the Edge
tooltip helps distinguish two different fibers with the same source and destination,
indicated as a letter within brackets. This letter is referred to as the Sibling Label. In the
example below, the Sibling Label [A] indicates another fiber exists with the same source
and destination.
Figure 3-11 Edge tooltip

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-14
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Link and Traffic Icons

The following table describes the types of links and traffic icons.
Table 3-11

Traffic Icons

Traffic Icon

Description
Link icon. Represents a sequence of fiber spans.
Relations icon. Represents a set of service demands.

Topology Map Pop-up Menu

The Topology Map contains a pop-up menu which has actions that assist in the design. To
access the Topology Map pop-up menu right-click on the Topology Map. Note: ensure
that the cursor is in Select mode, by clicking the Select icon or by clicking the middle
mouse button.
Figure 3-12 Topology Map Pop menu

The following table describes the options in the Topology Map pop-up menu.
Table 3-12

Topology Map pop-up menu

Option

Description

Create Default NE

Create a default NE site at the insertion point

Create Default 3R

Create a default regenerator site at the insertion point

Delete All Selected

Remove the selected items from the map

Select All

Select all design elements on the map

Deselect All

Clear all previously selected items.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-15
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-12

Topology Map pop-up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Invert Selection

Reverse the status of selection of all the items on the map.


Those items in the selected state are cleared and items in
the cleared state are selected.

Highlight All Selected

Highlight the selected items on the map

Site Pop-up Menu

Each site on the Topology Map contains a pop-up menu which has actions to edit the site.
To access the Site pop-up menu right-click on the site icon.
Figure 3-13 Site pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Site pop-up menu.
Table 3-13

Site pop-up menu

Option

Description

Edit Site

Open the Edit NE window to edit the Label, Type, and


Connectivity of the NE. For more information see, Edit
NE window (p. 4-18).

Highlight in Table

Open the Edit Sites window with the selected site


highlighted in the table. For more information, see Site
parameters (p. 4-20).

Highlight on Map

Clears all design elements except the selected site on the


Topology Map.

Create Link

Create a link to connect one site to another

Create Relation

Create an empty relation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-16
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-13

Site pop-up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Delete

Deletes the selected site from the Topology Map

Show Part List

Opens the Part List window which displays the equipment


parameters. For more information, see Show Sites/Part
List (p. 6-39).

Show Equipment View

Opens the Edit Equipments window which displays a


graphical representation of equipment and allows NE
creation/editing. For more information, see Show
Equipment View (p. 6-40) and Edit Equipments
window (p. 8-7).

Link Pop-up Menu

Each link on the Topology Map contains a pop-up menu which has actions to view and
edit the link. To access the Link pop-up menu right-click on the link of interest.
Figure 3-14 Link pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Link pop-up menu.
Table 3-14

Link pop-up menu

Option

Description

Highlight in Table

For a link of interest, opens the Edit Spans window. The


Link is highlighted in the table. For more information, see
Edit Spans window (p. 4-37).

Highlight on Map

Clears all design elements except the selected link on the


Topology Map.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-17
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-14

Link pop-up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Delete

Deletes the selected Link from the Topology Map

Design Link

Run the design process for selected links.

Show/Tune Design Results

Opens the Edit route optical design window for selected


links which displays the results of the design. For more
information, see Show/Tune Selected Links Design
(p. 6-3)

Show Physical Diagnostics

Opens the Optical design window for the last selected


links, which displays the optical design analysis in
graphical format. For more information, see Show
Selected Links Physical Diagnostics (p. 6-6)

Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility


Criteria

Opens a graphical representation of the optical feasibility


of links between nodes. For more information, see Show
Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria
(p. 6-15)

Show Line View [full spectrum]

The Line View is used as input for a link. It shows the path
followed by all wavelengths supported by the link. The
full spectrum view provides an ordered view of all
possible wavelengths (used or unused) on the link. For
more information, see Show Line View (p. 6-41).

Show Line View [optimized]

The Line View is used as input for a link. It shows the path
followed by all wavelengths supported by the link. The
optimized view provides a compact unordered view of the
used wavelengths only. For more information, see Show
Line View (p. 6-41).

Relation Pop-up Menu

Each relation on the Topology Map contains a pop-up menu which has actions to view
and edit the relation. To access the Relation pop-up menu right-click on the relation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-18
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-15 Relation pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Relation pop-up menu.
Table 3-15

Relation pop-up menu

Option

Description

Highlight in Table

For a Relation of interest, opens the Edit Services window.


The selected Relation is highlighted in the table. For more
information, see Edit Services window (p. 4-57).

Highlight on Map

Clears all design elements except the selected relation on


the Topology Map.

Delete

Deletes the selected Relation from the Topology Map

Highlight All Working Path

Highlights all working paths on the map.

Highlight All Protecting Path

Highlights all protecting paths on the map.

Highlight All Work+Prot Path

Highlights all working and protecting paths on the map.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-19
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP User Interface

Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
3-20
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
4

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on inputs used to design and plan a network.
Contents
Section 1: Starting the Design

4-3

Design Inputs

4-4

Incremental Design

4-6

Create a New Project

4-9

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)

4-11

Section 2: Sites

4-13

Sites

4-14

Create Sites

4-24

Edit NE Configuration

4-26

Edit Site Parameters

4-28

Delete Sites

4-29

Section 3: ILAs

4-30

ILAs

4-31

Change ILA Site Name

4-34

Section 4: Links and Spans

4-36

Links and Spans

4-37

Create Links and Spans

4-46

Edit Links and Spans

4-47

Add Spans to Links

4-48

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

4-50

Merge Spans

4-52

Delete Links and Spans

4-54

Identify a Link on the Map

4-55

Section 5: Relations and Services

4-56

Relations and Services

4-57

Create a Relation

4-78

Edit Relations and Services

4-79

Create Services

4-80

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service

4-82

Delete Relations and Services

4-84

Identify a Relation on the Map

4-85

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints

4-86

Section 6: Optical Subsets

4-88

Optical Subsets

4-89

Create Optical Subset

4-97

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

4-98

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

4-99

Failures Scope

4-105

Create an SRG

4-109

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs

4-110

Delete SRGs

4-111

Edit a Failures Scope

4-112

Section 8: Design Parameters

4-114

Design Parameters

4-115

WDM Layer Design Parameters

4-117

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

4-122

Set Design Parameters

4-125

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 1: Starting the Design


Overview
Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit design projects.
Contents
Design Inputs

4-4

Incremental Design

4-6

Create a New Project

4-9

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)

4-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Design Inputs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Design Inputs
Design inputs

This chapter describes the design elements required for input in the network design. The
following are the types of inputs that are considered in optical network design planning:

Sites - for more information, see Section 2: Sites (p. 4-13).

ILAs - for more information, see Section 3: ILAs (p. 4-30)

Links and Spans - for more information, see Section 4: Links and Spans (p. 4-36).
Relations and Services - for more information, see Section 5: Relations and
Services (p. 4-56).
Optical Subsets - for more information, see Section 6: Optical Subsets (p. 4-88)
Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope - for more information, see Section 7:
Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope (p. 4-98)
Design Parameters - for more information, see Section 8: Design Parameters
(p. 4-114).

Starting the ONDP design

After launching ONDP, the Init [ONDP] window is displayed, from which the user
chooses a default NE architecture and a background map to begin a new network design.
Alternatively, the user selects a saved project to open an existing network design. Each
network design that is created and saved is referred to as a project. The file name format
for saved projects is *.ondp. After a project is created, the project default NE
architecture and the background map cannot be changed.
For more information on NE architecture, see NE architecture (p. 4-16).
For more information on background map management, see Chapter 9, Map
Management.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Design Inputs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-1 Init [ONDP] window

ONDP project file encryption

Once a project is created, the *.ondp can be saved as an encrypted file. The option to
save projects in the encrypted format is controlled by clicking the Encrypt ONDP file on
saving checkbox in the File menu. Note: All projects saved while the Encrypt ONDP file
on saving checkbox is checked are saved as encrypted files. All project files saved while
the Encrypt ONDP file on saving checkbox is un-checked are saved as un-encrypted files.
This is also true for projects previously saved as encrypted files.
Figure 4-2 Encrypt ONDP file on saving checkbox

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Incremental Design
Overview

Incremental design is a feature which provides a method of partitioning the network


design into multiple user-defined steps. The user defines the topology and traffic matrix
information for each step. ONDP then performs the multiple step optimization and
provides map views, design results and BOM information on one specific step, a set of
steps or for all steps.
Design steps

The network design is divided into a series of numbered steps. A new design project, or a
network design that is imported is named Step 0 by default. The user determines the point
in the network design when a new step in the incremental design is necessary. Successive
steps in the design are named Step 1, Step 2, and so on.
Add, delete, and display steps

The Edit menu contains options which are related to Incremental Design and allow the
user to add, delete, and display steps in the incremental design.
Figure 4-3 Edit menu Incremental Design options

Table 4-1

Edit menu Incremental Design descriptions

Edit Incremental Design


menu command

Description

Insert Step After Current One

End the current design step and begin the next step in the
incremental design.

Delete Current Step

Delete all resources added during the current step in the


incremental design.

Highlight Current Step

Highlight all resources added during the current step in the


incremental design on the Topology map.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Step Slider window

The Step Slider window displays the resources added in specific steps of the Incremental
Design on the Topology map. To see newly added steps in the Step Slider window, close
and re-open the Step slider window as steps are added to the Incremental Design,
To access the Step Slider window, click the Show Step Slider icon in the Main toolbar.
Figure 4-4 Step Slider window

The center box of the Step Slider window indicates the current step number that is
displayed on the Topology map. Selecting the Prev button displays the resources created
in the previous steps of the incremental design on the Topology map. Likewise, selecting
the Next button displays the resources created in the subsequent step. The sliders can also
be used to move between steps, and indicate by their positions where the current step is in
the total design. For example, if a slider is all the way to the right, the indicated step is the
last step of the incremental design.
The following are the types of information the Step Slider can display on the Topology
map.

Topology - all resources of the specific step are displayed on the Topology map

Services - displays services added in the specific step on the Topology map. If the
Services slider is on Step 0, all resources for all steps display on the map as the
Topology slider is moved up or down the step counter. When the Services slider is

moved to subsequent steps, only the relations added in the specific step display on the
map. If the Topology and Services sliders are on the same step other than Step 0, only
those relations added in that step are displayed on the map. If the Topology slider is
moved to a higher step, the cumulative relations added in each step display on the
map by moving the Services slider up or down the step counter.
Example: If the Topology slider is on Step 4, and the Services slider is on Step 1, all
relations added in Step 1,Step 2, and Step 3 display on the map. If the Topology slider
is on Step 4 and the Services slider is on Step 3, only those relations added in Step 3
display on the map.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Bill of Material (multi-step) report

The Bill of Material (multi-step) report option displays the list of materials needed to
construct the network for each step in the incremental design, for a series of steps in the
incremental design, or for the whole design. For more information on this report, see
Show Bill of Material (multi-step) (p. 6-38).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Create a New Project

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create a New Project


When to use

Use this task to create a network design project. A new project can be created after
launching ONDP, or while working in a current project. New projects are saved with a
.ondp file extension.
Related information

For more information on NE architecture, see NE architecture (p. 4-16).


For more information on background maps, see Chapter 9, Map Management.
This task has two methods:

Task Method 1: Create a New Project From the Launch of ONDP (p. 4-9)

Task Method 2: Create a New Project From the Topology Map (p. 4-10)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task Method 1: Create a New Project From the Launch of ONDP

Complete the following steps to create a new design project immediately after launching
the ONDP software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Launch the ONDP software


Result: The Init [ONDP] window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specify a default NE architecture by selecting an option button. Possible selections are:


Fixed, Reconfigurable, Reconfigurable [DPSK], Tunable, Multidirectional Add/Drop or
Fast Restoration Multidirectional Add/Drop.
Result: NEs added to the design are created by default with the selected NE
architecture.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a map background from the Choose a default background map list.
Result: The selected background displays on the Topology Map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the New Project button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Create a New Project

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Topology Map is displayed with the selected map background, on which

to create a new design project.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task Method 2: Create a New Project From the Topology Map

Complete the following steps to create a new design project from the Topology Map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Topology Map, follow this path: File > New Project.
Result: The New Project Options [ONDP] window is displayed. Note: If the last

project was not saved, a warning box is displayed, offering the opportunity to Save or
Continue.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Choose a default architecture field, specify a default architecture by selecting an


option button. Possible selections are: Fixed, Reconfigurable, Reconfigurable [DPSK],
Tunable, Multidirectional Add/Drop or Fast Restoration Multidirectional Add/Drop.
Result: NEs added to the design are created by default with the selected NE

architecture.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a map background from the Choose a default background map list.
Result: The selected background displays on the Topology Map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Apply button.


Result: The Topology Map is displayed with the selected map background, on which
to create a new design project.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)


When to use

Use this task to open an existing network design project.


Note: When opening an existing project, the default architecture and the background map
cannot be changed.
Related information

For more information on NE architecture, see NE architecture (p. 4-16).


For more information on background maps, see Chapter 9, Map Management.
This task has two methods:

Task Method 1: Open an Existing Project (*.ondp file) From the Launch of ONDP
(p. 4-11)
Task Method 2: Open an Existing Project (*.ondp file) From the Topology Map
(p. 4-12)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task Method 1: Open an Existing Project (*.ondp file) From the Launch of ONDP

Complete the following steps to open an existing design project immediately after
launching the ONDP software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Launch the ONDP software


Result: The Init [ONDP] window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Open Project button.


Result: The ONDP dialog box window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the ONDP dialog box window, navigate to the desired project file and click Open.
Result: The selected project is displayed on the Topology Map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the design elements are not visible on the Topology Map, do one of the following.

From the toolbar, click the Fit to Contents icon.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-11
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 1: Starting the Design

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The entire set of design elements are displayed on the Topology Map,

regardless of scale.
Right click the Topology Map to display the Map menu.
Select Select All
Right click the Topology Map to display the Map menu.
Select Highlight all Selected.
Result: The design elements are displayed on the Topology Map to scale.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Task Method 2: Open an Existing Project (*.ondp file) From the Topology Map

Complete the following steps to open an existing design project from the Topology Map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Topology Map Main menu, select File > Open Project.
Result: The ONDP dialog box window is displayed. Note:If the last project was not

saved, a warning box is displayed, offering the opportunity to Save or Continue.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the ONDP dialog box window, navigate to the desired project file and click Open.
Result: The selected project is displayed on the Topology Map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the design elements are not visible on the Topology Map, do one of the following.

From the toolbar, click the Fit to Contents icon.


Result: The entire set of design elements are displayed on the Topology Map,
regardless of scale.
Right click the Topology Map to display the Map menu.
Select Select All
Right click the Topology Map to display the Map menu.
Select Highlight all Selected.
Result: The design elements are displayed on the Topology Map to scale.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-12
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 2: Sites
Overview
Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit sites.
Contents
Sites

4-14

Create Sites

4-24

Edit NE Configuration

4-26

Edit Site Parameters

4-28

Delete Sites

4-29

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-13
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Sites
Sites

Setting sites is the first step in designing a network. In this design step, place sites on the
map, define the site configuration, and set the site parameters.
For information on how to perform tasks related to sites, see the following:

Create Sites (p. 4-24)


Edit NE Configuration (p. 4-26)

Edit Site Parameters (p. 4-28)

Delete Sites (p. 4-29)

Types of sites

ONDP provides multiple types of sites on the Topology Map. A site is initially created as
a Default NE. After creating the configuration and physical connections, the site type
changes, and the change is indicated by the various site icons.
The site icon indicates the site type. The information displayed below the site icon is
divided into two sides. The right side displays the site name. The left side indicates the
NE architecture and its connectivity.
The following table describes examples of types of sites and the icons used to signify
them.
Table 4-2
Site icon

Types of sites
Description
Undefined NE site. A site which contains only one NE.
This NE is not connected to the network.

Terminal site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE


is a fixed NE and is only connected by one link to the
network. This site is opaque.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-14
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-2
Site icon

Types of sites

(continued)
Description
OADM site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE is
an R-OADM and can have multiple connections to the
network. This site is transparent.

OADM site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE is


a multidirectional NE. The maximum degree of the NE is
5.

3R site. A site which contains only regenerators. This NE is


a fixed NE and is connected by two links to the network.
This site is opaque.

ILA AGE site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE
is connected by two links and is used to correct the
wavelengths tilt. This site is transparent. A user is not able
to create this site. This type of site is automatically inserted
during the links design step.
PGE site when designing APA networks. In this case,
utilize a point to point network with fixed nodes containing
16 spans.
Default NEs

A default NE is identified by the letter case which is displayed on the left side of the NE
name. If the letter is lower case, then the NE is a default NE. Possible lower case letters
are: f, r, t or m which indicate fixed, reconfigurable, tunable, or multidirectional.
A default NE can have the type modified according to its connectivity. Default NEs
contain an asterisk (*) to indicate the NE degree is automatically computed based on the
connected links.
Based on the connected links, the following default NE types are displayed

No connected links - Undefined NE type


One connected link - Terminal NE type

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-15
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

More than one connected link - OADM NE type


Multidirectional link - OADM NE type

Note: A 3R NE type cannot be a default NE.


NE architecture

The default architecture is determined when creating a new project. After creating NEs
(based on default project architecture), the NE type and connectivity can be changed
using the Edit NE window (p. 4-18). This configuration information is indicated by the
two characters located below the site icon to the left of the site name.
The NE architecture is indicated by a letter in first position of the site icon label. A lower
case letter indicates the NE is a default NE. If you add or remove links, its type changes
automatically. An upper case letter indicates that the NE type has been selected by the
user. The possible letters and their meanings are:

f or F - fixed

r or R - reconfigurable

t or T - tunable

m or M - multidirectional

The connectivity is indicated by a digit in the second position of the site icon label. An
asterisk (*) indicates the NE connectivity is automatically computed from the number of
connected links. A numeric value indicates that the connectivity has been fixed by the
user. In this case the number of connected links cannot exceed the selected value but it
can be less to prepare future upgrades.
Examples

r*

This site contains a default NE, indicated by the lower case letter. The default
project architecture is r - reconfigurable
The NE type (terminal, OADM) is deduced from its connectivity.
The connectivity is automatic, indicated by the asterisk (*). The connectivity is
equal to the number of connected links.

R*

This site contains an NE with user-selected architecture, indicated by the upper


case letter. The user has selected R - Reconfigurable.
The NE type (Reconfigurable OADM WMAN3 or Reconfigurable OADM
WMAN9) has been selected by the user.
The connectivity is automatic, indicated by the asterisk (*). The connectivity is
equal to the number of connected links.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-16
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R3

This site contains an NE with user-selected architecture, indicated by the upper


case letter. The user has selected R - Reconfigurable.
The NE type (Reconfigurable OADM WMAN3 or Reconfigurable OADM
WMAN9) has been selected by the user.
The connectivity is forced - if two links are already connected, the NE will be able
to be upgraded with one more link in the future.

NE types

The following are the supported NE configuration types:

Line Terminal

Fixed Line terminal (50 GHz and 100 GHz)


Tunable Line Terminal WMAN3 (50 GHz)

3R
Note: For the following 3R NEs, the regeneration feature is supported. Add/Drops are

not supported.

OADM

B-OADM (50 GHz and 100 GHz)


B-OADM degree 2
R-OADM WMAN1 (50 GHz)
R-OADM WMAN degree 2

R-OADM degree 2, 3, and 4, based on WMAN3174 and OCNC12x0 (50 GHz)


R-OADM degree 2 to 7 based on WMAN3174 and OCNC 1280 (50 GHz)
R-OADM degree 2 to 7 based on WMAN3374 (100 GHz)
R-OADM degree 2 to 8 based on WMAN9499 and OCNC1280 (50 GHz)
T-OADM degree 2 to 4 based on WMAN3174 and OCNC12x0 (50 GHz)
(OSNCP)
T-OADM degree 2 to 7 based on WMAN3174 and OCNC1280 (50 GHz)
(OSNCP)
Directionless T-OADM degree 8 based on WMAN3174 (50 GHz)
directionless T-OADM degree 8 based on WMAN9199 (50 GHz)

Back to back line terminal


Tunable back to back line terminal (WMAN3)

Directionless T-OADM degree 8 based on WMAN9499 (50 GHz)


ILA
Repeater (TT) (auto placement) (degree 2) (not available on network view)

Programmable Gain Equalizers (PGE) based on WMAN1 without ALC insertion


Automatic Gain Equalizers (AGE) based on WMAN3174 with ALC insertion

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-17
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AGE based on WMAN3174 with ALC insertion, with OADC0100


AGE based on WMAN3374 with ALC insertion
AGE based on WMAN9499 with ALC insertion, with OADC0104

AGE based on WMAN9499 with ALC insertion, with OADC0100


Bypass site automatic placement by ONDP

NE connectivity rules

After creating sites, the NE type and connectivity can be changed using the Edit NE
window (p. 4-18). The following are rules for managing NE connectivity.

If the connectivity is set below the link connection count, links are deleted. If the NE
reverts to the previous architecture, the user can select Undo.

If an NE type with specific connectivity is selected, the connectivity is also set and
excess links could be automatically deleted.

Optical rules compatibility are enforced and only NE compatible types are presented.
For example, a fixed terminal is compatible with all NE types. In a Terminal
OADM Terminal connection, OADM can be changed to any NE type.
NE ROADM degree 8 based on WMAN3 does not support relations (add/drop
traffic). Connectivity modification could delete existing relations. If this condition is
not desired, the user is able to select Undo.

NE compatibility rules

The following are rules for NE compatibility. Two compatible NEs can be connected to
each other with an optical link.

NEs with WMAN3 are compatible with each other


NEs with WMAN3 or WMAN9 are compatible with each other
BOADM NEs and NEs with WMAN1 are compatible with each other
Line terminals (also called fixed terminals) and Back to Back terminals are
compatible with all NE types
A Back to Back terminal is able to separate two sets of incompatible NEs. For
example: Line terminal BOADM Back to Back terminal TROADM
Tunable Line terminal

Edit NE window

The Edit NE window is used to change the NE configuration. For more information, see
Edit NE Configuration (p. 4-26)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-18
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-5 Edit NE window

The following table describes the options in the Edit NE window.


Table 4-3

Edit NE window

Option

Description

Label

Change the name of the NE

Type

Change the NE type. A change to this field is indicated in


the first character of the site icon label. Only compatible
types are presented. For a list of all NE types see, NE
types (p. 4-17). For a list of compatibility rules, see NE
compatibility rules (p. 4-18).

Connectivity

Change the connectivity of the NE. For connectivity rules,


see NE connectivity rules (p. 4-18).

Multidir A/D blocks

Change the number of Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks

Unidir A/D allowed

Check the checkbox to allow unidirectional add/drop


blocks.

Rename multidir blocks

Check the checkbox to allow multidirectional add/drop


blocks (local OTS) name to be user-defined. This field is
operational only for multidirectional NEs.

Multidir blocks names

Change the name of the default multidirectional add/drop


blocks (local OTS). Allowed value is any one character
string, except /. /, [. ]. *, ?. This field is operational only
for multidirectional NEs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-19
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-3

Edit NE window

(continued)

Option

Description

Regeneration

Select from the Regeneration field menu:

Auto 3R (default) ONDP controls the location of


regeneration sites

Favor 3R ONDP prioritizes the setting of 3R site on

this node, if regeneration is necessary along a path


going through this node

Forbid 3R ONDP will not allow 3R setting on this

node

Site parameters

After configuring the site architecture and connectivity, configure the site parameters.
Edit Sites window

The Edit Sites window is used to configure the site details. To access the Edit Sites
window, do one of the following:

From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:


Inputs > Edit Sites

Right click a site on the Topology Map. From the Site pop up menu, select Highlight
in Table.
Double click a single site on the Topology Map. Multiple icons can be selected by
holding the Shift key while selecting Sites.

Figure 4-6 Edit Sites window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-20
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Sites Pop-up Menu

The Edit Sites window contains a pop-up menu that offers additional actions to configure
sites. To access this menu, right click in any field in the Edit Sites window.
Figure 4-7 Edit Sites window pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Edit Sites window pop-up menu.
Table 4-4

Edit Sites window pop-up menu

Option

Description

Undo

Undo the last action performed

Redo

Redo the last action that was undone

Copy Selected Cells

Copy the highlighted cells to the clipboard

Paste Cells

Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All

Select all sites in the table

Clear All

Clear all previously selected sites.

Highlight All Selected on Map

Highlight the selected items in the table on the Map

Site parameters

Editable site parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) appearing before the parameter
title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in
the Edit Sites window. Additional entry methods are indicated in the following table.
Table 4-5

Site parameters

Parameter

Definition

Default value

Step

The step of the


incremental design in
which the site was
created

S0. For more information on incremental


design, see Incremental Design (p. 4-6).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-21
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-5

Site parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+Site Label

Name to identify the


site

System generated.

NE Type

Identifies the type of


NE

System generated. This label is presented on


the dispersion graph. For more information
see, Figure 6-4, Dispersion Map window
(p. 6-9).

+NE Label

Name to identify the


NE

System generated. This label is presented on


the Edit Equipment window (Equipment
view).

3R for Restoration
Count [TrxA]

Number of 3R
positioned for
restoration after
dimensioning for
transponder A.
(Transit OEO with or
without recoloring)

System generated. For more information, see


Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis
GMRE Simulator (p. 7-9).

3R for Restoration
Count [TrxB]

Number of 3R
positioned for
restoration after
dimensioning for
transponder B.
(Transit OEO with or
without recoloring)

System generated. For more information, see


Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis
GMRE Simulator (p. 7-9).

Note: This field can also be changed by double


clicking the Site icon label on the Map. If the
site is an ILA site, it can be changed in the
+Site Label field in the Edit ILA window.

+Longitude [X]

When placing a site on the map, longitude is


automatically populated based on the site
position.

+Latitude [Y]

When placing a site on the map, latitude is


automatically populated based on the site
position.

+Country

None
Note: Entering a valid city name as the Site
Label automatically populates the country.
This feature currently supports selected cities
in France and Spain.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-22
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Sites window buttons

The Edit Sites window contains buttons which perform the following actions.
Table 4-6
Button

Edit Sites window button actions


Tool tip

Description

Remove selected
sites

Delete the highlighted sites from the network


design.

Remove all sites

Delete all sites from the network design.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-23
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Create Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Sites
When to use

Use this task to create sites.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Sites (p. 4-14)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to create a site.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

Right click the Map to display the Map pop-up menu and select one of the following
options.

Create Default NE

Create Default 3R

Select one of the following Site icons on the toolbar and click the desired location on
the Topology Map.
Site icon

Description
Create Default NE

Create Default 3R

Result: The site is created and the selected site icon appears at the cursor insertion

point on the Map.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

After determining the NE type and connectivity, and editing the site parameters, the site
type icon can change.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-24
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Create Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For further information, see

Types of sites (p. 4-14)

Edit NE Configuration (p. 4-26)

Edit Site Parameters (p. 4-28)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-25
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Edit NE Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit NE Configuration
When to use

Use this task to view or modify the NE configuration, which includes the NE type and
connectivity.
Related information

See the following topics in this document:

Sites (p. 4-14)

NE architecture (p. 4-16)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a site must have been created.


Task

Complete the following steps to view or modify the NE configuration, which includes the
NE type and connectivity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following to display the Edit NE window

From the Topology Map, right click a Site icon.


The Site Pop-up Menu (p. 3-16) is displayed.

From the Site pop-up menu, select Edit Site

From the Topology Map, double click the NE label.


Result: The Edit NE window (p. 4-18) is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Label field, enter the NE name.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Type field, select the NE type from the list. Only the allowable types are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Connectivity field, select the number of links from the list. Only allowable values
are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Multidir A/D blocks field, select the number of multidirectional add/drop blocks
from the list. This field is only available for multidirectional NEs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-26
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Edit NE Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check or clear the Undir A/D allowed checkbox, as required by the design.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To enable or disable rename multidirectional add/drop blocks, do the following:

Check or clear the Rename multidir blocks checkbox, as required.

In the Multdir blocks names field, change the multidirectional add/drop names (local
OTS), as required by the user.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To use the Regeneration field to control the location of regeneration sites, choose one of
the options from the Regeneration field list:

Auto 3R (default) ONDP controls the location of regeneration sites

Favor 3R ONDP prioritizes the setting of 3R site on this node, if regeneration is


necessary along a path going through this node
Forbid 3R ONDP will not allow 3R setting on this node

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Apply button.


Result: The NE configuration is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-27
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Edit Site Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Site Parameters


When to use

Use this task to view or modify site parameters.


Related information

See the following topics in this document:

Sites (p. 4-14)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a site must have been created.


Task

Complete the following steps to view or modify site parameters.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:


Inputs > Edit Sites

Double click a single site on the Topology Map. Multiple icons can be selected by
holding the Shift or the Ctrl key while selecting Sites.
Result: The Edit Sites window is displayed. Sites that are selected on the Topology

Map are highlighted in the table. For an illustration of the Edit Sites window, see
Figure 4-6, Edit Sites window (p. 4-20).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit the site parameters. For a description of the site parameters, see Table 4-5, Site
parameters (p. 4-21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Close.
Result: The Site parameters are modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-28
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 2: Sites

Delete Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Sites
When to use

Use this task to delete sites from the network design.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Sites (p. 4-14)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a site must have been created.


Task

Complete the following steps to delete sites from the network design.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

Follow the steps in the Edit Site Parameters (p. 4-28) task to display the Edit Sites
window and select the sites to be deleted. Click the Remove selected sites button or
the Remove all sites button. For more information, see Edit Sites window buttons
(p. 4-23).
From the Topology Map, select the sites to be deleted. Do one of the following:
Click the Delete Selected icon from the toolbar.

From the Main menu, follow this path:


Edit > Delete Selected.
Right click a Site to display the Sites pop-up menu. Click Delete. Note: Only the
Site for which the Site pop-up menu is displayed is deleted.

Result: The selected sites are deleted from the network design.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-29
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 3: ILAs

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 3: ILAs
Overview
Purpose

This section provides information on ILA sites.


Contents
ILAs

4-31

Change ILA Site Name

4-34

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-30
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 3: ILAs

ILAs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ILAs
ILAs

The next step in network planning and design is to consider renaming ILA site names.
ILAs are automatically created by ONDP as a result of running the links design. The
following are the types of ILA sites that ONDP creates:

ILA AGE site A site which contains only one NE. This NE is connected by two links

and is used to correct the wavelengths tilt. This site is transparent. A user is not able to
create this site. This type of site is automatically inserted during the links design step.
ILA PGE site when designing APA networks. In this case, utilize a point to point
network with fixed nodes containing 16 spans.
ILA the ILA site is a simple amplifier, which is not visible on the Network Map, but
does appear in the list of ILAs in the Edit ILAs window.

For information on how to perform tasks related to ILAs, see

Change ILA Site Name (p. 4-34) to change the ILA site name

Edit Site Parameters (p. 4-28) to change editable ILA AGE/PGE parameters

Edit NE Configuration (p. 4-26) to change the label of the ILA AGE/PGE site

Edit ILAs window

The Edit ILAs window displays a list of ILA and Bypass sites. When the ILA Label or
NE Label are changed in this window, the modification is reflected the Edit Spans
window. Note: To change the name of an ILA site, use the Edit ILAs window and modify
the specific ILA Label.
To access the Edit ILAs window, follow this menu path: Inputs > Edit ILAs
Figure 4-8 Edit ILAs window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-31
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 3: ILAs

ILAs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ILA parameters

Editable ILA parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) appearing before the parameter
title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in
the Edit ILA window. To change a field, press the Tab key or click in a different field.
Warning: Interaction occurs between the Edit ILAs window, the Spans window and Sites

window, as well as other affected windows and reports throughout the tool. For example,
if the ILA Label is changed in the Spans table of the Edit Spans window, the ILA name
will change in the affected fields in the Spans table, the Edit ILAs window, and all other
windows and reports in which ILA Site Label is contained.
Table 4-7

ILA parameters

Parameter

Definition

Default value

Steps

The step of the


incremental design in
which the link was
created

S0. For more information on incremental


design, see Incremental Design (p. 4-6).

+ILA Label

Name to identify the


ILA site

System generated.

NE Type

Identifies the type of


NE

Note: This field changes what is contained in


the Site Label field on the Spans window and
all other related windows, fields, and reports.
System generated. Possible values are ILA or
Bypass. This label is presented on the

dispersion graph. For more information see,


Figure 6-4, Dispersion Map window
(p. 6-9).
+NE Label

Name to identify the


NE

+Country

System generated. User is able to edit this field


as required.
None
Note: Entering a valid city name as the Site

Label automatically populates the country.


This feature currently supports selected cities
in France and Spain.
Edit ILAs Pop-up Menu

The Edit ILAs window contains a pop-up menu that offers additional actions to configure
ILAs. To access this menu, right click in any field in the Edit ILAs window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-32
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 3: ILAs

ILAs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-9 Edit ILAs window pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Edit ILAs window pop-up menu.
Table 4-8

Edit ILAs window pop-up menu

Option

Description

Undo

Undo the last action performed

Redo

Redo the last action that was undone

Copy Selected Cells

Copy the highlighted cells to the clipboard

Paste Cells

Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All

Select all sites in the table

Deselect All

Clear all previously selected sites.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-33
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 3: ILAs

Change ILA Site Name

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change ILA Site Name


When to use

Use this task to change the name that ONDP has assigned to an ILA site to a user-defined
site name.
This task is divided into 2 methods:

Method 1: Change ILA Site Name for ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE Sites (p. 4-34)
Method 2: Change ILA Site Name for ILA/Bypass Sites (p. 4-35)

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

ILAs (p. 4-31)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, the ILA site must have been created by ONDP.
Method 1: Change ILA Site Name for ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE Sites

Complete the following steps to change ILA site name for ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE sites.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

From the Edit Sites window (p. 4-20), double click on the Site Label field for the
desired ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE, and enter the new ILA name.
From the Edit NE window (p. 4-18), change the name of the ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE
in the Label field.
Result: The selected ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE site names are changed in all related
ONDP fields and reports.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-34
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 3: ILAs

Change ILA Site Name

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Method 2: Change ILA Site Name for ILA/Bypass Sites

Complete the following steps to the change ILA site name for ILA/Bypass sites.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

From the Edit ILAs window (p. 4-31), double click on the ILA Label field and enter
the new ILA/Bypass site name.
From the Edit Spans window (p. 4-37) window, double click in either the NE name
before span field, or the NE name after span field and enter the new ILA/Bypass
site name.
Result: The selected ILA/Bypass site names are changed in all related ONDP fields

and reports.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-35
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 4: Links and Spans


Overview
Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit links and spans.
Contents
Links and Spans

4-37

Create Links and Spans

4-46

Edit Links and Spans

4-47

Add Spans to Links

4-48

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

4-50

Merge Spans

4-52

Delete Links and Spans

4-54

Identify a Link on the Map

4-55

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-36
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Links and Spans


Links and Spans

The next step in network planning and design is to consider the links between the sites.
For information on how to perform tasks related to links and spans, see the following:

Create Links and Spans (p. 4-46)

Edit Links and Spans (p. 4-47)

Add Spans to Links (p. 4-48)

Delete Links and Spans (p. 4-54)


Identify a Link on the Map (p. 4-55)

Edit Spans window

The Edit Spans window is used to configure link details and the span details associated
with the links. The window is divided into two sections: Links and Spans. When a link is
selected from the Links section, the spans associated with the link are displayed in the
Spans section. Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a
parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans
Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans
table.
Figure 4-10 Edit Spans window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-37
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Links Pop-up Menu

The Edit Spans window contains two pop-up menus that offer additional actions to
configure links and spans parameters: the Links pop-up menu and the Spans pop-up
menu. To access the Links pop-up menu, right click any field in the Links table.
Figure 4-11 Links table pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Links table pop-up menu.
Table 4-9

Links table pop-up menu

Option

Description

Undo

Undo the last action

Redo

Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells

Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells

Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All

Select all links on the map

Deselect All

Clear all previously selected links.

Highlight All Selected on Map

Highlight the links that are selected on the Map in the


Links table

Design Selected Links

Run the design process for selected links.

Show/Tune Design Results

Opens the Edit route optical design window which displays


the results of the design and allows the design to be
changed. For more information, see Show/Tune Selected
Links Design (p. 6-3).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-38
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-9

Links table pop-up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Show Physical Diagnostics

Opens a window which allows you to toggle between the


Dispersion Map and Optical design results for a design. For
more information, see Show Selected Links Physical
Diagnostics (p. 6-6).

Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility


Criteria

Opens the FFC window. If the optical inputs change, the


Fast Feasibility Criteria (FFC) value displays the optical
feasibility of links between nodes and is recalculated. For
more information, see Show Selected Links Real-Time
Fast Feasibility Criteria (p. 6-15).

Links parameters

Editable link parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) appearing before the parameter
title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in
the Edit Spans window. To change a field, press the Tab key or click in a different field.
Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.
Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans
Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans
table.
Table 4-10

Links parameters

Parameter

Definition

Default value

Steps

The step of the


incremental design in
which the link was
created

S0. For more information on incremental


design, see Incremental Design (p. 4-6).

Source Site

Identifies the
origination site of the
link

(varies)

Destination Site

Identifies the end site


of the link

(varies)

Sibling Label

Differentiates two
links from the same
source to the same
destination

Empty, A, B, C, D, ...

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-39
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-10

Links parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+Link name

Name for the OMS

Default value: [Source Site name] [Destination


Site name] [Sibling Label if not empty].
Editable field. Any string of characters
allowed except strings containing /. /, [. ]. *, ?.

+Fiber Type

Identifies the type of


fiber

Possible values are: SMF (default), E-leaf,


TWRS, and DSF. Mixed fiber type is
automatically generated; it is not an entry
available to the user. For more information,
see Mixed fiber type with DSF (p. 4-41).

+Subset

Identifies the name of


the subset to which
this link belongs

Select the subset from the pull down list, or


accept the default. For more information on
subsets, see Section 6: Optical Subsets
(p. 4-88).

+Spans Count

Sets the number of


spans in the link

+Length [km]

Sets the length in


[km] of the link.
Represents the total
length of all the spans
in the link.

100. This field is interactive with the Length


fields in the Spans table. Changing the value
in this parameter changes the value in the
Length parameter in the Spans table. Adding
spans to the link increases the value of this
field. For more information, see Mixed fiber
type with DSF (p. 4-41).

+Lineic Loss
[dB/km]

Ratio between the


loss and the length

+Loss [dB]

Sets the loss in dB of


the span

22

+BOL/EOL Loss
Margin

Beginning of
Life/End of Life loss
margin.

PMD [ps]

Polarization Mode
Dispersion

1. This field is the result of the calculation


coming from the spans. Each span brings a
PMDi per span equal to the square root of
Length * PMDi coefficient. The total PMD is
calculated by: PMD 2=Sum for each span
PMDi 2 per span. In this example, only one
span exists, therefore the square root of 100 =
10 multiplied by 0.1 leads to 1 ps.

Sets the loss of the link. Represents the total


losses of all the spans in the link.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-40
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-10

Links parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+Administrative Cost

User-defined entry
which assigns a cost
to the routing. A
lower cost gives
preference to the
path. This field is
used for RWA
optimization.

+Computation Mode

Used to define how


the audit process is
controlled on this
resource. Possible
values are:
Automatic,
Semi-Auto, Manual,
or NLP/OSNR

Automatic
For more information, see Set Computation
Mode parameter (p. 7-4)

Mixed fiber type with DSF

If an OMS contains mixed fibers types with at least one DSF, there is a restriction on the
length of the other fiber type. The following table lists the maximum length (km)
authorized for the other fiber type, to prevent exceeding the dispersion limit.
Table 4-11

Mixed fiber types with DSF length restriction


SMF

E-LEAF

TW-RS

TeraLight

10G NRZ

33

94

102

62

40G P-PDSK

54

156

170

103

Links table buttons

The Links table in the Edit Spans window contains buttons which perform the following
actions.
Table 4-12
Button

Links table button actions


Tool tip

Description

Remove selected link

Delete the highlighted links from the


network design.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-41
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-12

Links table button actions

Button

(continued)

Tool tip

Description

Remove all links

Delete all links from the network design.

Spans Pop-up Menu

The Edit Spans window contains two pop-up menus that offer additional actions to
configure links and spans parameters: the Links pop-up menu and the Spans pop-up
menu. To access the Spans pop-up menu, right click any field in the Spans table.
Figure 4-12 Spans table pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Spans pop-up menu.
Table 4-13

Spans table pop-up menu

Option

Description

Undo

Undo the last action

Redo

Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells

Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells

Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All

Select all links on the map

Deselect All

Clear all previously selected links.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-42
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-13

Spans table pop-up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Copy Span to Add Model

Copies all of the parameters of the selected span to the Add


Span tool tip. The parameters are displayed on the Add
Span tool tip. To add a span with the copied parameters,
click the Add Span button. For more information, see
Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span
(p. 4-50).

Copy Cell to Add Model

Copies the parameters of the selected cell to the Add Span


tool tip. The copied parameters are displayed on the Add
Span tool tip. To add a span with the copied parameters,
click the Add Span button. For more information, see
Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span
(p. 4-50).

Merge Selected Spans

Merges a set of selected contiguous spans. The result is a


single span with the characteristics of the selected spans.
For more information, see Merge Spans (p. 4-52).

Spans parameters

Editable span parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) before the parameter title. These
parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in the Edit
Spans window. To see a change in a field, press the Tab key or click in a different field.
Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.
Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans
Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans
table.
Table 4-14

Span parameters

Parameter

Definition

Default value

Steps

The step of the


incremental design in
which the span was
created.

S0. For more information on incremental


design, see Incremental Design (p. 4-6).

+Order

Order in which the


span displays in the
table

(varies)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-43
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-14

Span parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+NE name before


span

Site, ILA, or Bypass


before the span in the
considered direction

Editable field. Any string of characters


allowed except strings containing /. /, [. ]. *, ?.
Default value is the name of the Site, ILA, or
Bypass that is located at the beginning of the
span.

+NE name after span

Site, ILA, or Bypass


after the span in the
considered direction

Editable field. Any string of characters


allowed except strings containing /. /, [. ]. *, ?.
Default value is the name of the Site, ILA, or
Bypass that is located at the end of the span.

+Span name

Name for the OTS

Default value: [Source name] [Destination


name]. Editable field. Any string of characters
allowed.
Default value definitions:

+Fiber Type

Identifies the type of


fiber

Source name site or ILA before the span


in the considered direction

Destination name site or ILA after the


span in the considered direction

Possible values are: SMF (default), E-leaf,


TWRS, and DSF

+Length [km]

Sets the length in


[km] of the span.

This field is interactive with the Length and


Spans Count fields in the Links table. The
value in this field is the length of the link
divided by the number of spans. Changing the
value in this parameter changes the value in
the Length parameter in the Links table.

+BOL Lineic Loss


[dB/km]

Ratio between the


loss and the length

0.22. This field changes when the Length field


is changed.

+ BOL Loss [dB]

Sets the Beginning of


Life loss in dB of the
span

22

PMD Coefficient
[ps/sqrt(km)]

Polarization - Mode
Dispersion

0.1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-44
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Spans table buttons

The Spans table in the Edit Spans window contains buttons which perform the following
actions.
Table 4-15
Button

Spans table button actions


Tool tip

Description
Add a span with the specified parameters to
the link. The tool tip displays the parameters
of the span that is added.
For more information on how to change the
parameter information before adding the
span, see Change Span Parameters and Copy
to a New Span (p. 4-50)

Remove selected
spans

Delete the highlighted spans from the link.

Remove all spans


but one

Delete all spans but one from the link.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-45
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Create Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Links and Spans


When to use

Use this task to create a link. When a link is created between two sites, a span is also
automatically created.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Links and Spans (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to create a link.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

Select the Create Link icon on the Topology Map toolbar.

Right click the site to display the Site pop-up menu. From the Site pop-up menu,
select Create Link.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On the Topology Map, click the Site from which the link originates and drag the cursor to
the site on which the link terminates.
Result: A blue line representing a link is created between the sites. A single span for

the link is automatically created.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-46
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Edit Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Links and Spans


When to use

Links and spans are viewable and editable from the Edit Spans window. Use this task to
view and edit links and spans.
Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans
Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans
table.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Links and Spans (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

To complete this task, a link must be created.


Task

Complete the following steps to view and edit links and spans.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display the Edit Spans window by doing one of the following:

From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:


Inputs > Edit Links/Spans

Right click a link on the Topology Map. From the Link pop-up menu, select Highlight
in Table.
Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed. Links that are selected on the Topology

Map are highlighted in the table. For an illustration of the Edit Spans window, see
Figure 4-10, Edit Spans window (p. 4-37).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit the link/span parameters. For a description of the link parameters, see Table 4-10,
Links parameters (p. 4-39). For a description of the span parameters, see Table 4-14,
Span parameters (p. 4-43).
Result: The links and spans are changed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-47
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Add Spans to Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Add Spans to Links


When to use

Use this task to add spans to links.


Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans
Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans
table.
Note: When spans are added to a link, ONDP automatically creates ILA or Bypass sites

between the spans. Once created, ILA or Bypass sites are displayed in the Edit ILAs
window. For more information, see Edit ILAs window (p. 4-31).
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Links and Spans (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to add spans to links.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the first step in the Edit Links and Spans (p. 4-47) to display the Edit Spans
window.
Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the link to which spans will be added.


Result: The link is selected and the spans in the link are displayed in the Spans table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following to add spans to the selected link.

In the Links table, click in the Spans Count field and enter the number of spans.

In the Spans table, mouse over the Add Span button on the left side of the table. If the
Span parameters are correct, click the Add Span button.
Note: The Add Span button tool tip displays the parameters of the Span that will be
added. To change the parameters of a span and copy them to a new span, see Change
Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span (p. 4-50).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-48
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Add Spans to Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Spans are added to the link and the associated parameters are redefined in the

tables.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-49
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span


When to use

Use this task to Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span.
Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans
Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans
table.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Links and Spans (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

Complete the following steps to change the span information displayed in the Add Span
button tool tip and copy to a new span.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the first step in the Edit Links and Spans (p. 4-47) to display the Edit Spans
window.
Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the link to which spans will be added.


Result: The link is selected and the spans in the link are displayed in the Spans table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Spans table, select the Span to copy.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

To copy all the span parameters to the Add Span button tool tip, right click in the table
to display the Spans table pop-up menu, and select Copy Span to Add Model.

To change a parameter in the span, edit the span parameter, right click in the table to
display the Spans table pop-up menu, and select Copy Cell to Add Model.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-50
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Span parameter information is changed in the Add Span button tool tip.
To view the change applied to the Add Model, mouse over the Add Span button for at

least one second.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Add Span button.


Result: The new span is added to the table below the selected row.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-51
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Merge Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Merge Spans
When to use

Use this task to merge spans.


Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans
Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans
table.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Links and Spans (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

To merge spans, the spans must be compatible. Merged spans must have the same type
(SMF, LEAF, TWRS, or DSF).
Task

Complete the following steps to add merge spans.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the first step in the Edit Links and Spans (p. 4-47) to display the Edit Spans
window.
Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the link on which spans will be merged.


Result: The link is selected and the spans in the link are displayed in the Spans table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the spans to merge. To select multiple spans, hold the Shift key while selecting
spans. Note: Spans must be contiguous.
Result: Selected spans are highlighted in the table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click the Spans table to display the Spans table pop-up menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Spans table pop-up menu, select Merge Selected Cells.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-52
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Merge Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The selected spans are merged into a single span containing the characteristics

from the merged cells.


Note: Once spans are merged, some ILA or Bypass sites between them are deleted.

This can be seen in the Edit ILAs window. For more information, see Edit ILAs
window (p. 4-31).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-53
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Delete Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Links and Spans


When to use

Use this task to delete links and spans from the network design.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Links and Spans (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to delete links or spans from the network design.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

Follow the first step in the Edit Links and Spans (p. 4-47) task to display the Edit
Spans window and select the links or spans to be deleted. Do one of the following:
Click the Remove selected links or the Remove selected spans button.

From the Links table, select the Remove all links button.

From the Spans table, select the Remove all spans but one button.

From the Topology Map, select the links to be deleted. Do one of the following:
Click the Delete Selected icon from the toolbar.

From the Main menu, follow this path:


Edit > Delete Selected.
Right click the Map and select Delete All Selected from the Map pop-up menu.

Result: The links and spans are deleted.

Note: If a link is deleted, all ILAs and Bypass sites on the link are deleted. If a
span is deleted, the corresponding ILA or Bypass sites are deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-54
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 4: Links and Spans

Identify a Link on the Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Identify a Link on the Map


When to use

Use this task to identify a link on the Map.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Links and Spans (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a link must be created.


Task

Complete the following steps to identify links on the Map.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the first step in the Edit Links and Spans (p. 4-47) task to display the Edit Spans
window.
Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a link by clicking the link row. Multiple links can be selected by holding the [Shift]
key while selecting links.
Result: The links are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click in the Edit Spans window.


Result: The Links pop-up window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Links pop-up window, select Highlight All Selected on Map.
Result: The selected links are highlighted on the Topology Map.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-55
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 5: Relations and Services


Overview
Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit relations and services.
Contents
Relations and Services

4-57

Create a Relation

4-78

Edit Relations and Services

4-79

Create Services

4-80

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service

4-82

Delete Relations and Services

4-84

Identify a Relation on the Map

4-85

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints

4-86

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-56
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Relations and Services


Relations and Services

The next step in network planning and design is to consider the traffic matrix. In ONDP,
this step is accomplished through relations and services.
For information on how to perform tasks related to relations and services, see the
following:

Create a Relation (p. 4-78)

Edit Relations and Services (p. 4-79)

Create Services (p. 4-80)

Delete Relations and Services (p. 4-84)

Identify a Relation on the Map (p. 4-85)

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints (p. 4-86)

Routing constraints

The use of spectral and spacial routing constraints enables the user to impact the Routing
and Wavelength Allocation (RWA) of services. It is possible to specify both the path
(spatial constraint) and the wavelength (spectral constraint). For more information, see
Edit Spectral Constraint window (p. 4-74) and Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints
(p. 4-86)
Most Disjoint feature

The Most disjoint feature is designed to release design constraints if no other solution is
available . This feature allows, under some conditions, infringement of disjointness rules.
To activate this feature, check the Most disjoint on links/nodes checkbox located on the
Traffic Setting Design Parameters (p. 4-122).
Edit Services window

The Edit Services window is used to configure relations details and the services details
associated with the relations. The window is divided into two sections: Relations and
Services. When a relation is selected from the Relations section, the services associated
with the relation are displayed in the Services section. Interaction occurs between the
Relations table and the Services table. Changing a parameter in one table can affect the
parameters in the other. For example, if the Services Count is changed in the Relations
table, the services for the relation is redefined in the Services table.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-57
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-13 Edit Services window

Relations Pop-up Menu

The Edit Services window contains two pop-up menus that offer additional actions to
configure relations and services parameters: the Relations table pop-up menu and the
Services table pop-up menu. To access the Relations table pop-up menu, right click any
field in the Relations table.
Figure 4-14 Relations table pop-up menu

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-58
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table describes the options in the Relations table pop-up menu.
Table 4-16

Relations table pop-up menu

Option

Description

Undo

Undo the last action

Redo

Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells

Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells

Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All

Select all relations in the table

Deselect All

Clear all previously selected relations.

Topo Highlight...

Opens the Topo Highlight menu, which contains


commands to highlight relations on the Topology Map. For
more information, see Figure 4-15, Topo Highlight... pop
up menu (p. 4-60).

Freeze all Constraints [W+P]

Prevents the RWA of all working and protecting paths from


changing

Freeze all Constraints [W+P]


Except Unprotected

Prevents the RWA of all working and protecting paths from


changing, except for unprotected paths.

Clear all [W] Constraints

Clear the RWA for all working paths

Clear all [P] Constraints

Clear the RWA for all protecting paths

Working [W] Constraints

Opens the Working Constraints pop up menu, which


contains commands to create or edit the RWA for working
paths. For more information, see Figure 4-16, Working
[W] Constraints pop up menu (p. 4-60).

Protecting [P] Constraints

Opens the Protecting Constraints pop up menu, which


contains commands to create or edit the RWA for
protecting paths. For more information, see Figure 4-17,
Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu (p. 4-61)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-59
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Topo Highlight... menu contains commands to highlight relations on the Topology
Map. To access this menu, right click in the Relations table, and from the Relations table
pop up menu, move the cursor to the Topo Highlight... command.
Figure 4-15 Topo Highlight... pop up menu

Option

Description

Highlight All Selected on Map

Highlight the relations that are selected in the


table on the Topology Map

Highlight All [W] Paths

Highlights all working paths on the Map.

Highlight all [P] Paths

Highlights all protecting paths on the Map.

Highlight all [W+P] Paths

Highlights both working and protecting paths


on the Map.

The Working [W] Constraints pop up menu contains commands to create or edit
constraints on relations. To access this menu, right click in the Relations table, and from
the Relations table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Working [W] Constraints
command.
Figure 4-16 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

Table 4-17

Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

Option

Description

Highlight [W] Path Constraints

Highlight working path constraints on the


Topology Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-60
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-17

Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Freeze [W] Computed Path (Spatial Only)

Prevent the computed spatial working path


from changing.

Freeze [W] Computed Path (Spatial +


Spectral)

Prevent the computed spatial and spectral


working path from changing.

Set [W] Path Constraints from Map Selection

Set working path constraints selected on the


Topology Map

Clear [W] Constraints

Clear all working path constraints.

The Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu contains commands to create or edit
protecting constraints on relations. To access this menu, right click in the Relations table,
and from the Relations table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Protecting [W]
Constraints command.
Figure 4-17 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

Table 4-18

Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

Option

Description

Highlight [P] Path Constraints

Highlight protecting path constraints for


relations on the Topology Map

Freeze [P] Computed Path (Spatial Only)

Prevent the computed spatial protecting path


from changing.

Freeze [P] Computed Path (Spatial + Spectral)

Prevent the computed spatial and spectral


protecting path from changing.

Set [P] Path Constraints from Map Selection

Set protecting path constraints for relations


selected on the Topology Map

Clear [P] Constraints

Clear all protecting path constraints for


relations.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-61
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Relations parameters

Editable relations parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) before the parameter title.
These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in the
field. After changing the field value, press the Tab key or click in a different field.
Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.
Table 4-19

Relations parameters

Parameter

Definition

Default value

Steps

The step of the


incremental design in
which the relation
was created.

S0. For more information on incremental


design, see Incremental Design (p. 4-6).

Source Site

Identifies the
origination site of the
relation

(varies)

Destination Site

Identifies the end site


of the relation

(varies)

Sibling Label

Differentiates two
links from the same
source to the same
destination

Empty, A or B

+Client Traffic

Sets the client side


board for the relation

Allowable values are defined in the


Transponder Bitrate and Encoding fields on

the Set Design Parameters window,


corresponding to the line side. The default is
defined by the value set in the TrxA field.
To change the Client Traffic field double click
the field and select from the list. For more
information, see Setting Client Traffic,
Concentration, and OCH Line fields
(p. 4-63).
+Concentration

Sets the type of


concentration for the
relation

None.

Allowable values are determined by the Client


Traffic and Transponder Bitrate and
Encoding fields. Only allowable values are
displayed.
To change the Concentration field double
click the field and select from the list. For
more information, see Setting Client Traffic,
Concentration, and OCH Line fields
(p. 4-63).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-62
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-19

Relations parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+OCH Line

Sets the OCH line


type of this relation

Allowable values are determined by the values


set in the Client Traffic, Transponder Bitrate
and Encoding, and Concentration fields.
To change the OCH Line field double click the
field and select from the list. For more
information, see Setting Client Traffic,
Concentration, and OCH Line fields
(p. 4-63).

+Protection Type

Sets the protection of


the relation

Unprotected

Select the Protection Type from the list by


double clicking in the field. Changing this
field changes the Protection Type of all the
service in the relation. Possible values are:
Unprotected, Protection 1 + 1, Restoration
SBR or Restoration PRC.

+Disjointness

Sets disjoint
condition for diverse
path routing

Varies, based on the value selected in the


Protection Type field. Affects the routing of
unprotected and SBR services. Services can
have the same sources and destinations or
different sources and destinations.

+Services Count

Sets the number of


services in the
relation

Capacity [Mb/s]

Identifies the capacity


in [Mb/s] of the
relation. Represents
the total capacity of
all the services in the
relation.

Varies, based on the values in the Service


Type and Service Count fields.

Setting Client Traffic, Concentration, and OCH Line fields

The values in the Client Traffic, Concentration, and OCH Line fields interact with each
other and also interact with the services in the relation. Based on the changes made, the
values in the Client Traffic, Concentration, and OCH Line fields may change, and the
possible options available for selection in these fields may change, in both the Relations
table and the Services table.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-63
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Relations table buttons

The Relations table in the Edit Services window contains buttons which perform the
following actions.
Table 4-20
Button

Relations table button actions


Tool tip

Description

Remove selected
relations

Delete the highlighted relations from the


network design.

Remove all relations

Delete all relations from the network design.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-64
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Services Pop-up Menu

The Edit Services window contains two pop-up menus that offer additional actions to
configure relations and services parameters: the Relations pop-up menu and the Services
pop-up menu. To access the Services pop-up menu, right click any field in the Services
table.
Figure 4-18 Services table pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Services table pop-up menu.
Table 4-21

Services table pop-up menu

Option

Description

Undo

Undo the last action

Redo

Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells

Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells

Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All

Select all services in the table

Deselect All

Clear all previously selected services.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-65
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-21

Services table pop-up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Copy Service to Add Model

Copies all of the parameters of the selected service to the


Add Service tool tip. The parameters are displayed on the
Add Service tool tip. To add a service with the copied
parameters, click the Add Service button. For more
information, see Change Service Parameters and Copy to
a New Service (p. 4-82).

Copy Cell to Add Model

Copies the parameters of the selected cell to the Add


Service tool tip. The copied parameters are displayed on
the Add Service tool tip. To add a service with the copied
parameters, click the Add Service button. For more
information, see Change Service Parameters and Copy to
a New Service (p. 4-82).

Delete From Upper Steps

Deletes the selected Services from upper steps in the


incremental design.

Line View...

Opens the Line View pop up menu, which contains


commands to view working and protecting wavelengths in
a Line View report. For more information, see Figure 4-19,
Line View... pop up menu (p. 4-67)

Topo Highlight...

Opens the Topo Highlight menu, which contains


commands to highlight services on the Topology Map. For
more information, see Figure 4-20, Topo Highlight... pop
up menu (p. 4-68).

Working [W] Constraints...

Opens the Working Constraints pop up menu, which


contains commands to create or edit working constraints on
services. For more information, see Figure 4-21, Working
[W] Constraints pop up menu (p. 4-68).

Protecting [P] Constraints...

Opens the Protecting Constraints pop up menu, which


contains commands to create or edit protecting constraints
on services. For more information, see Figure 4-22,
Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu (p. 4-69).

Set Mutual Disjointness

Opens the Set Mutual Disjointness window for the selected


service to identify services as mutually disjointed for the
path computation. For more information, see Set Mutual
Disjointness window (p. 4-76).

Clear Mutual Disjointness

Clears Mutual Disjointness setting for the selected service.

Navigate to Failure Report

Opens the Show Failures Report, which indicates the


impact of failures in the network. For more information,
see Show Failures Report (p. 6-24).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-66
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-21

Services table pop-up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Ports View

Opens the Ports View pop up menu, which contains


commands to manually manage ports on concentrators. For
more information, see Manual Management of Ports on
Concentrators - Concepts (p. 8-15) and Manual
Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface
(p. 8-16)

The Line View... menu contains commands to view working and protecting wavelengths
in a Line View report. To access this menu, right click in the Services table, and from the
Services table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Line View... command.
Figure 4-19 Line View... pop up menu

Table 4-22

Line View... pop up menu

Option

Description

Highlight [W] in Line View (Full Spectrum)

Opens the Line View (Full Spectrum) and


shows the working wavelength. (See Figure
6-28, Line View (full spectrum) report
(p. 6-43))

Highlight [W] in Line View (Compact)

Opens the Line View (optimized) and shows


the working wavelength. (See Figure 6-28,
Line View (full spectrum) report (p. 6-43))

Highlight [P] in Line View (Full Spectrum)

Opens the Line View (Full Spectrum) and


shows the protecting wavelength. (See Figure
6-28, Line View (full spectrum) report
(p. 6-43))

Highlight [P] in Line View (Compact)

Opens the Line View (optimized) and shows


the protecting wavelength. (See Figure 6-28,
Line View (full spectrum) report (p. 6-43))

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-67
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Topo Highlight... menu contains commands to highlight services on the Topology
Map. To access this menu, right click in the Services table, and from the Services table
pop up menu, move the cursor to the Topo Highlight... command.
Figure 4-20 Topo Highlight... pop up menu

Table 4-23

Topo Highlight...pop up menu

Option

Description

Highlight [W] Path

Highlights working path on the Map.

Highlight [P] Path

Highlights protecting path on the Map.

Highlight [W+P] Paths

Highlights both working and protecting paths


on the Map.

The Working [W] Constraints pop up menu contains commands to create or edit
constraints on services. To access this menu, right click in the Services table, and from the
Services table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Working [W] Constraints command.
Figure 4-21 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

Table 4-24

Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

Option

Description

Highlight [W] Path Constraints

Highlight working path constraints for


services on the Topology Map

Freeze [W] Computed Path (Spatial Only)

Prevent the computed spatial working path


from changing.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-68
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-24

Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Freeze [W] Computed Path (Spatial +


Spectral)

Prevent the computed spatial and spectral


working path from changing.

Set [W] Path Constraints from Map Selection

Set working path constraints for services


selected on the Topology Map

Edit Spectral [W] Constraints

Change spectral working path constraints for


services

Clear [W] Constraints

Clear all working path constraints for services

The Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu contains commands to create or edit
protecting constraints on services. To access this menu, right click in the Services table,
and from the Services table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Protecting [P]
Constraints command.
Figure 4-22 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

Table 4-25

Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

Option

Description

Highlight [P] Path Constraints

Highlight protecting path constraints for


services on the Topology Map

Freeze [P] Computed Path (Spatial Only)

Prevent the computed spatial protecting path


from changing.

Freeze [P] Computed Path (Spatial + Spectral)

Prevent the computed spatial and spectral


protecting path from changing.

Set [P] Path Constraints from Map Selection

Set protecting path constraints for services


selected on the Topology Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-69
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-25

Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

(continued)

Option

Description

Edit Spectral [P] Constraints

Change spectral protecting path constraints for


services

Clear [P] Constraints

Clear all protecting path constraints for


relations.

Services parameters

Editable services parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) before the parameter title.
These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in the
field. After changing the field value, press the Tab key or click in a different field.
Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.
Table 4-26

Services parameters

Parameter

Definition

Default value

Steps

The step of the


incremental design in
which the service was
created.

S0. For more information on incremental


design, see Incremental Design (p. 4-6)

+Service Label

The name of the


service

Editable field. Automatically generated by


ONDP in the format Service_ID

+Client Traffic

Sets the client side


board for the service

Allowable values are defined in the


Transponder Bitrate and Encoding fields on

the Set Design Parameters window,


corresponding to the line side. The default is
defined by the value set in the TrxA field.
To change the Client Traffic field double click
the field and select from the list. For more
information, see Setting Client Traffic,
Concentration, and OCH Line fields
(p. 4-63).
+Concentration

Sets the type of


concentration for the
service

Allowable values are determined by the Client


Traffic and Transponder Bitrate and
Encoding fields. Only allowable values are
displayed.
To change the Concentration field double
click the field and select from the list. For
more information, see Setting Client Traffic,
Concentration, and OCH Line fields
(p. 4-63).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-70
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-26

Services parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+OCH Line

Sets the OCH line


type of this service

Allowable values are determined by the values


set in the Client Traffic, Transponder Bitrate
and Encoding, and Concentration fields.
To change the OCH Line field double click the
field and select from the list. For more
information, see Setting Client Traffic,
Concentration, and OCH Line fields
(p. 4-63).

+Working Source
A/D

Sets the working


source Add/Drop
block

Auto ONDP sets the local OTS Add/Drop

block for the working source. The user can


select from a list of allowable Add/Drop
blocks. For more information, see
Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks
differentiation (p. 4-74)
This field only displays if the Rename
multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window
is checked for at least one multi-directional
TOADM NE in the network. For more
information, see Edit NE window (p. 4-18).

+Working
Destination A/D

Sets the working


destination local OTS
Add/Drop block

Auto ONDP sets the local OTS Add/Drop

block for the working destination. The user


can select from a list of allowable Add/Drop
blocks. For more information, see
Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks
differentiation (p. 4-74)
This field only displays if the Rename
multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window
is checked for at least one multi-directional
TOADM NE in the network. For more
information, see Edit NE window (p. 4-18).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-71
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-26

Services parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+Protecting Source
A/D

Sets the protecting


source local OTS
Add/Drop block

Auto ONDP sets the local OTS Add/Drop

block for the protecting source. The user can


select from a list of allowable Add/Drop
blocks. For more information, see
Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks
differentiation (p. 4-74)
This field only displays if the Rename
multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window
is checked for at least one multi-directional
TOADM NE in the network. For more
information, see Edit NE window (p. 4-18).

+Protecting
Destination A/D

Sets the protecting


destination local OTS
Add/Drop block

Auto ONDP sets the local OTS Add/Drop

block for the protecting destination. The user


can select from a list of allowable Add/Drop
blocks. For more information, see
Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks
differentiation (p. 4-74)
This field only displays if the Rename
multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window
is checked for at least one multi-directional
TOADM NE in the network. For more
information, see Edit NE window (p. 4-18).

+Protection Type

Capacity [Mb/s]

Sets the protection of


the service

Identifies the capacity


in [Mb/s] of the
relation. Represents
the total capacity of
all the services in the
relation.

Unprotected
Select the Protection Type from the menu by
double clicking in the field. Changing this
field changes the value in the Protection Type
field in the Relations table. Possible values
are: Unprotected, Protection 1 + 1,
Restoration SBR or Restoration PRC.
Varies, based on the values in the Client
Traffic field.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-72
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-26

Services parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+Disjointness

Sets disjoint
condition for diverse
path routing

Varies, based on the value selected in the


Protection Type field. Affects the routing of
the nominal and the protection path to have a
disjoint path only on link or on nodes and
links.

Mutual Disjointness

Identifies the services


that are mutually
disjointed for the path
computation

Displays the label of the service specified on


the Set Mutual Disjointness window. For more
information, see Set Mutual Disjointness
window (p. 4-76).

Constraints

Identifies the working


or protecting
constraints for the
spatial and/or spectral
paths.

Varies, base on the values set

Services table buttons

The Services table in the Edit Services window contains buttons which perform the
following actions.
Table 4-27
Button

Services table button actions


Tool tip

Description
Add a service with the specified
parameters to the relation. The tool tip
displays the parameters of the service
that will be added.
For more information on how to
change the parameter information
before adding the span, see Change
Service Parameters and Copy to a
New Service (p. 4-82).

Remove selected services

Delete the highlighted services from


the relation.

Remove all services

Delete all services from the relation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-73
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks differentiation

The following fields in the Edit Services window facilitate the differentiation of the
multidirectional Add/Drop blocks in multidirectional configurations.

Working Source A/D

Working Destination A/D

Protecting Source A/D

Protecting Destination A/D

Note: These fields display only if the user assigns a specific name to each

multidirectional Add/Drop block of at least one multidirectional NE in the network. This


is done by checking the Rename multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window, and
entering a one character string in the Multidir blocks name field for each Add/Drop
block. For more information, see Edit NE window (p. 4-18).
For each service, for the corresponding NE, these A/D fields set the Add/Drop block
supporting the associated transponder. The default value of these fields is Auto, meaning
the input is automatically set by ONDP. In the following cases, manual selection is
allowed, to change the value from that which is automatically set. Only allowable
selections are presented, based on the type of NE. The following are possible allowed
values:

Uni the service Add/Drop is performed on the corresponding fixed Add/Drop block

Multi_# the service Add/Drop is performed on the selected named multidirectional


Add/Drop block. The # is the name set in the Multidir blocks names field, in the Edit

NE window.
If no protection is defined for the service, a dash (-) displays in the Protecting Source
A/D and Protecting Destination A/D fields. This is not modifiable.
Edit Spectral Constraint window

The Edit Spectral Constraint window is used to manually define the spectral constraints
on a service, once the spatial constraint is defined. A spectral constraint can be both on the
working or protecting path.
Using the Edit Spectral Constraint window, the user can do the following:

Add or remove 3Rs


Define color constraints

Identify conflicts between constraints and. ALC channels

For more information, see Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints (p. 4-86).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-74
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-23 Edit Spectral Constraint window

The following table describes the fields and options on the Edit Spectral Constraints
window.
Field/Option

Description

Current Service:

Identifies the name of the service and whether the


service is Working or Protecting

Slide Fields

Slide left or right to decrease or increase the value.

Drop

Select the Drop value from the list. Possible selections


are: Auto, Uni, or Multi_#

Add

Select the Add value from the list. Possible selections


are: Auto, Uni, or Multi_#

Highlight on Map

Highlights the service on the Topology Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-75
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Field/Option

Description

Clear all 3Rs

Remove all 3Rs from this service

Display Frequency

Select from the pull-down list to change the displayed


information in the Edit Spectral Constraints window.
Possible selections are: Display ITU Id, Display
Frequency, or Display Wavelength.

Activate Single Color

Check this box to have the same color on each trail.

Conflicts Count

Indicates the number of constraints and/or ALC channel


conflicts

Set Mutual Disjointness window

The Set Mutual Disjointness window sets the services that are mutually disjointed for the
path computation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-76
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-24 Set Mutual Disjointness window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-77
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Create a Relation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create a Relation
When to use

Use this task to create a relation. When a relation is created between two sites, a default
service is automatically created. Additionally, you can access the Edit Services window
and manually add any services.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Relations and Services (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to create a relation.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

Select the Create Relation icon on the Topology Map toolbar.

Right click the site to display the Site pop-up menu. From the Site pop-up menu,
select Create Relation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On the Topology Map, click the Site from which the relation originates and drag the
cursor to the site on which the relation terminates.
Result: A red line representing a relation is created between the sites.
Note: To create services see the Create Services (p. 4-80) task.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-78
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Edit Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Relations and Services


When to use

Relations and Services are viewable and editable from the Edit Services window. Use this
task to view and edit relations and services.
Warning: Interaction occurs between the Relations table and the Services table. Changing

a parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the
Services Count is changed in the Relations table, the services for the relation are
redefined in the Services table.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Relations and Services (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to view and edit relations and services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display the Edit Services window by doing one of the following:

From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:


Inputs > Edit Relation/Services

Right click a relation on the Topology Map. From the Relations pop-up window,
select Highlight in Table.
Result: The Edit Services window is displayed. Relations that are selected on the

Topology Map are highlighted in the table. For an illustration of the Edit Services
window, see Edit Services window (p. 4-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit the relations/services parameters. For a description of the relation parameters, see
Table 4-21, Services table pop-up menu (p. 4-65). For a description of the services
parameters, see Table 4-26, Services parameters (p. 4-70).
Result: The relations and services are changed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-79
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Create Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Services
When to use

Use this task to create a relation. When a relation is created between two sites, a service is
not automatically created. To create services, access the Edit Services window and
manually add any services.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Relations and Services (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to create a relation.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the steps in the Create a Relation (p. 4-78) task to create a relation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display the Edit Services window by doing one of the following:

From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:


Inputs > Edit Relation/Services

Right click a relation on the Topology Map. From the Relations pop-up window,
select Highlight in Table.
Result: The Edit Services window is displayed. Relations that are selected on the
Topology Map are highlighted in the table. For an illustration of the Edit Services
window, see Edit Services window (p. 4-57).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If not already done so, select a relation in the Relations table.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following to add services to the selected relation.

In the Relations table, click in the Services Count field and enter the number of
services.
In the Services table, mouse over the Add Service button on the left side of the table.
If the Service parameters are correct, click the Add Service button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-80
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Create Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The Add Service button tool tip displays the parameters of the service that are

added. To change the parameters of a service and copy them to a new service, see
Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service (p. 4-82).
Result: Services are created for the relation and the associated parameters are
redefined in the tables.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-81
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service


When to use

Use this task to Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service.
Warning: Interaction occurs between the Relations table and the Services table. Changing

a parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Relations and Services (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to change the service information displayed in the Add
Service button tool tip and copy to a new service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the first step in the Edit Relations and Services (p. 4-79) to display the Edit
Services window.
Result: The Edit Services window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the relation to which service will be added.


Result: The relation is selected and the services in the relation are displayed in the
Services table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Services table, select the service to copy.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

To copy all the service parameters to the Add Service button tool tip, right click in the
table to display the Services table pop-up menu, and select Copy Service to Add
Model.

To change a parameter in the service, edit the service parameter, right click in the
table to display the Services table pop-up menu, and select Copy Cell to Add Model.
Note: The Copy Cell to Add Model function is not available for the Client traffic,
Concentration, or OCH Line parameters.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-82
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Service parameter information is changed in the Add Service button tool
tip. To view the change applied to the Add Model, mouse over the Add Service button

for at least one second.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Add Service button.


Result: The new service is added to the table below the selected row.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-83
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Delete Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Relations and Services


When to use

Use this task to delete relations and services from the network design.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Relations and Services (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to delete relations and services from the network design.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

Follow the first step in the Edit Relations and Services (p. 4-79) task to display the
Edit Services window and select the relations or services to be deleted. Do one of the
following:
Click the Remove selected relations or the Remove selected services button.

From the Relations table, select the Remove all relations button.

From the Services table, select the Remove all services button.

From the Topology Map, select the relations to be deleted. Do one of the following:
Click the Delete Selected icon from the toolbar.
From the Main menu, follow this path:
Edit > Delete Selected.
Right click the Map and select Delete All Selected from the Map pop-up menu.
Result: The relations and services are deleted.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-84
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Identify a Relation on the Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Identify a Relation on the Map


When to use

Use this task to identify a relation on the Topology Map.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Relations and Services (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a relation must be created.


Task

Complete the following steps to identify relations on the Map.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the first step in the Edit Relations and Services (p. 4-79) task to display the Edit
Services window.
Result: The Edit Services window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select a relation by clicking the relation row. Multiple relations can be selected by
holding the [Shift] key while selecting relations.
Result: The relations are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click in the Edit Services window.


Result: The Relations pop-up window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Relations pop-up window, select Highlight All Selected on Map.
Result: The selected relations are highlighted on the Topology Map.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-85
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints


When to use

Use this task to create or edit spectral constraints for working and protecting paths.
The use of spectral and spacial routing constraints enables the user to impact the Routing
and Wavelength Allocation (RWA) of services. It is possible to specify both the path
(spatial constraint) and the wavelength (spectral constraint). The spatial constraint must
be defined before the spectral constraint.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Relations and Services (p. 4-57)


Edit Spectral Constraint window (p. 4-74)

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints (p. 4-86)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a relation must be created.


Task

Complete the following steps to create or edit spectral constraints for working and
protecting paths.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On the Topology Map, highlight the link associated with the relation/service for which the
spectral constraints will be set.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open the Edit Services window using one of the following methods.

Right click on the relation on the Topology Map, and select Highlight in Table from
the Relation pop-up menu
From the Main menu, select Inputs > Edit Relations/Services. Select the relation
associated with the link selected in Step 1.
Result: The Edit Services window is displayed, and the relation is highlighted in the
Relations table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Edit Services window, select the service(s) from the Services table.
Note: If a service is not selected, the constraints will be set for all services in the relation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-86
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 5: Relations and Services

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click in the Relations table or Services table to display the table pop-up menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the table pop-up menu, select Working [W] Constraints... or Protecting [P]
Constraints....
Result: The Working [W] Constraints... or the Protecting [P] Constraints... pop-up

menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Working [W] Constraints... or Protecting [P] Constraints... pop-up menu, select
either Set [W] Path Constraints from Map Selection or Set [P] Path Constraints from
Map Selection.
Result: The Constraints field changes to W[Manu S] or P[Manu S].
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the service(s) in the Service table for which the spectral constraints will be set.
Right click in the Services table to display the Services table pop-up menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Services table pop-up menu, select Edit Working [W] Constraints... or Edit
Protecting [P] Constraints.
Result: The Edit Spectral Constraints window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit the spectral constraints for the working or protecting path.


Result: The constraint is set.

After running the design, the user can freeze the computed path in order to perform a new
design with the previously computed path as a constraint. To freeze the computed path
follow these steps:

From the Services table, right click on the constraints to display the Service table
pop-up menu
From the Services table pop-up menu, select Working [W] Constraints or Protecting
[P] Constraints to display the Working [W] Constraints or Protecting [P] Constraints
pop-up menu
From the Working [W] Constraints pop-up menu or the Protecting [P] Constraints
pop-up menu, select either Freeze Computed Path (Spatial Only) or Freeze
Computed Path (Spatial + Spectral)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-87
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 6: Optical Subsets


Overview
Purpose

This section provides information on optical subsets.


Contents
Optical Subsets

4-89

Create Optical Subset

4-97

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-88
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Optical Subsets
Optical Subset

An optional step in network planning and design is to consider grouping channels into
optical subsets. In ONDP, optical subsets allow the user to manage the following:

Subset name
Subset Channel Mask channels not included are forbidden. Selection can be by
channel spacing mask or specific mask

Maximum number of channel supported by the subset


Allowed line bitrate and encoding
Line tuning preference

For information on how to perform tasks related to optical subsets, see:

Create Optical Subset (p. 4-97)

Edit Optical Subsets window

The Edit Optical Subsets window is used to configure parameters of the Optical Subset.
To access the Edit Optical Subsets window, follow this menu path: Inputs > Edit Optical
Subsets
Figure 4-25 Edit Optical Subsets window

Optical Subset parameters

Editable Optical Subset parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) appearing before the
parameter title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering
the value in the Edit Optical Subsets window. To change a field, press the Tab key or click
in a different field.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-89
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links window, as well as other affected

windows and reports throughout the tool. For example, if the Name field is changed on
the Edit Optical Subset window, the Subset name will change in the Edit Spans window,
and reports in which Subset name is contained.
Table 4-28

Optical Subset parameters

Parameter

Definition

Default value

+Name

Name to identify the


subset

System generated. Editable field. Any string of


characters allowed.

+Channel Mask

Sets the channel mask


of the subset by
channel spacing or
specific mask.
Channels not selected
are excluded from the
subset.

Possible values are:

Global (default) all channels are

included in the subset

50 GHz

100 GHz

200 GHz

DSF mask: 16 fixed ch

DSF masks: 2 Forghieri grids

For more information, see Channel Mask


parameter (p. 4-92).
Channel Max
Number

Maximum number of
channels supported
by the subset links.

Auto. Controlled globally on the Set Design

+Allowed Bitrate and


Encoding

The bitrate and


encoding allowed for
this subset.

Auto. Controlled globally on the Set Design

+Line Tuning Pref.

The line tuning


optimization
preference for this
subset

APE. If line tuning preference is applicable to a

Parameters window. User is able to edit this


field. For more information see, Channel max
number parameter (p. 4-93)
Parameters window. The user is able to edit
this field by selecting from the allowed values
in the list. For more information, see
Transponder bitrate & encoding (p. 4-118).
link, the specified line tuning is used. This is
typically used for a fixed terminal - fixed
terminal configuration. Line tuning preference
is applicable to a link when it is possible to
make a design based on APE or on APA.
Note: APA design is not guaranteed.

Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu

The Edit Optical Subsets window contains a pop-up menu that offers additional actions to
configure subsets. To access the Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu, right click any field
in the table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-90
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-26 Edit Optical Subsets window pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Edit Optical Subsets window pop-up
menu.
Table 4-29

Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu

Option

Description

Undo

Undo the last action

Redo

Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells

Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells

Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All

Select all links on the map

Deselect All

Clear all previously selected links.

Edit Selected Subset Mask

Open the Edit Subset Mask window to change the


properties of the selected subset mask. For more
information, see Edit Subset Mask window (p. 4-95).

Highlight All Selected on Map

Highlight on the Topology Map, the subsets that are


selected in the Edit Optical Subsets window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-91
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Optical Subsets table buttons

The Optical Subsets table in the Edit Optical Subsets window contains buttons which
perform the following actions.
Table 4-30
Button

Optical Subsets table button actions


Tool tip

Description

Add Optical Subset

Add a default optical subset to the


table. After adding the default subset,
the user can edit the subset as
required.

Remove selected optical


subsets

Delete the highlighted optical subsets


from the network design.

Remove all optical subsets

Delete all optical subsets from the


network design. Note: At least one
optical subset must remain on the
Optical Subsets window.

Channel Mask parameter

The Channel Mask parameter sets the channel mask of the subset by either channel
spacing selection or by a specific mask. Channels not specified by the mask are excluded
from the subset.
Channel mask selection by channel spacing mask

The default Global channel mask is set by the Channel spacing parameter in the Set
Design Parameters window. Possible values to set the Channel spacing globally are: 50
GHz, 100 GHz, or 200 GHz.To access this field, follow this path:
Inputs > Set Design Parameters window > Channel Setting tab > Channel
spacing

The user can change the Global channel spacing setting in the Channel Mask field on the
Edit Optical Subsets window. The subset selected value cannot be lower than the Global
Channel spacing value. If the Global Channel spacing is increased in the Design
Parameters window, the subset channel spacings are automatically increased to that value
if the subset values were lower.
For more information on the setting the default channel spacing for the entire network,
see Channel spacing parameter (p. 4-119)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-92
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel mask selection by specific mask

Specific subset masks can also be set for network designs that include G653 Dispersion
Shifted Fiber (DSF), which carries irregular channel spacing. Two subset mask settings
are supported:

DSF mask: 16 fixed chs for more information, see DSF mask: 16 fixed channels

(p. 4-93)

DSF mask: 2 Foghieri grids For more information, see DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri

grids (p. 4-94)


Channel max number parameter

The Channel max number parameter allows the user to set the maximum number of
channels supported by links in the specified subset. This parameter is set globally in the
Transponder bitrate and encoding parameter on the Set Design Parameters window.
The default of Auto in this field indicates the value is the same as the global parameter.
The user is able to edit this field. Possible values are 1 to 96, except where limited by the
architecture. For more information, see Transponder bitrate & encoding (p. 4-118).
Channel Allocations for G653 DSF

The following sections describe the channel allocations for the selected Channel Mask if
G653 DSF is in the subset.
50GHz, 100 GHz, and 200 GHz channel spacing

For network designs containing G653 DSF that choose 50GHz, 100 GHz, and 200 GHz
channel spacing for the Channel Mask, channel allocation to Band 5 is forbidden.
Therefore the following channels number of channels are available for the OMS:

Channels loaded at 50 GHz only 88 channels are available for the OMS if DSF is in
the OMS
Channels loaded at 100 GHz only 44 channels are available for the OMS if DSF is
in the OMS
Channels loaded at 200 GHz only 22 channels are available for the OMS if DSF is
in the OMS

DSF mask: 16 fixed channels

The following table lists the channel allocation for network designs containing G653 DSF
that specify a G653 DSF fixed grid of 16 channels for the Channel Mask,
Channel

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

16

195.850

1530.73

15

195.700

1531.89

14

195.450

1533.86

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-93
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

13

195.250

1535.43

12

194.900

1538.19

11

194.600

1540.56

10

194.450

1541.75

193.700

1547.72

193.300

1550.92

193.100

1552.52

192.750

1555.34

192.450

1557.77

192.300

1558.98

192.050

1561.01

191.850

1562.64

191.600

1564.68

DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri grids

The Channel Mask DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri grids allows ONDP to provide a Channel
Mask based on a Forghieri grid with 8 channels with irregular channel spacing.
The typical Forghieri grid uses a 132 format where:

Based on the specified first frequency (Example: v1 = 193.90 THz)


The 2nd frequency is 100 GHz from the 1st (Example: v2 = 193.80THz)
The 3rd frequency is 300 GHz from the 2nd (Example: v3 = 193.50 THz)
The 4th frequency is 200 GHz from the 3rd (Example: v4 = 193.30 THz)

ONDP supports 2 Forghieri grids, therefore 2 first frequencies are specified for this mask.
For information on how to modify these channel mask frequency values, see Edit Subset
Mask window (p. 4-95). The default frequencies the ONDP provides for the DSF Mask:
2 Foghieri grids channel mask are:

Grid 1 193.90 THz.


Grid 2 192.00 THz

The user can modify the default first frequencies, however the 2 Forghieri grids must be
separated by at lease 10 nm. Additionally, if one of the 8 channels is in Band 5, an error
message is given, and the user is directed to choose another frequency for the mask.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-94
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Subset Mask window

The Edit Subset Mask window allows the user to manage the Channel Mask properties of
the specified subset. To access this window, select a subset on the Edit Optical Subsets
window, and right click to display the Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu. From the menu,
select Edit Selected Subset Mask.
Figure 4-27 Edit Subset Mask window

The following table describes the fields and options on the Edit Subset Mask window
Field/Option

Description

Edit Subset Name

Identifies the name of the subset mask and


allows the user to edit the subset mask name.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-95
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Field/Option

Description

Select Mask Type

Identifies the subset mask type and allows the


user to change the type of subset mask
Possible values are:

Global (default) all channels are

included in the subset

50 GHz

100 GHz

200 GHz

DSF mask: 16 fixed chs

DSF masks: 2 Forghieri grids

For more information, see Channel Mask


parameter (p. 4-92).
Edit Forghieri Grid 1 Frequency

Enter the starting frequency for the 1st


Forghieri Grid in GHz, or use the slide to
select it. The computed irregular channel
frequencies based on the 132 Forghieri Grid
spacing are listed below the field. For more
information, see DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri
grids (p. 4-94)

Edit Forghieri Grid 2 Frequency

Enter the starting frequency for the 2nd


Forghieri Grid in GHz, or use the slide to
select it. The computed irregular channel
frequencies based on the 132 Forghieri Grid
spacing are listed below the field. For more
information, see DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri
grids (p. 4-94)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-96
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 6: Optical Subsets

Create Optical Subset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Optical Subset


When to use

Use this task to create an optical subset. By default, all channels are included in the subset
provided by ONDP named subset_1.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Optical Subsets (p. 4-89)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to create an optical subset.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path: Inputs > Edit Optical Subsets.
Result: The Edit Optical Subsets window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Edit Optical Subsets window, click the Add Optical Subset button.
Result: A default optical subset is added to the table. Edit the newly created subset as

required.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-97
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure


Scope
Overview
Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit Shared Risk Groups
(SRGs) and Failure Scope.
Contents
Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

4-99

Failures Scope

4-105

Create an SRG

4-109

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs

4-110

Delete SRGs

4-111

Edit a Failures Scope

4-112

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-98
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)


Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

An additional step in network planning and design is to consider the Shared Risk Groups.
A Shared Risk Group is a set of networking resources that experience the same risk of
being affected by a failure, such as a cable cut. A common risk exists for the elements of
the group. SRGs permit protection of traffic on a spare route which is different from the
main route, avoiding the risk of the same problem affecting all resources in the group. For
example, if an SRG consists of Link 1 and Link 2, a failure on the SRG affects both links.
Therefore, the working and protecting path must not use both links to protect from failure
of both links at the same time.
For information on how to perform tasks related to SRGs, see the following:

Create an SRG (p. 4-109)

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs (p. 4-110)

Delete SRGs (p. 4-111)

Edit SRGs window

The Edit SRGs window is used to configure SRGs. The window contains two tabs:
Contents and Parameters.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-99
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-28 Edit SRGs window Contents tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-100
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-29 Edit SRGs window Parameters tab

Edit SRGs window Main menu

The Edit SRGs window Main menu contains the following options:

SRG
Included

Excluded

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-101
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SRG menu
Figure 4-30 SRG menu

SRG menu command

Description

Create New

Create a new SRG

Delete Selected

Delete a selected SRG

Delete All SRGs

Delete All SRGs from the network design

Included menu

Links/Sites can be included in SRGs using the Included commands.


Figure 4-31 Included menu

Table 4-31

Included menu

Included menu commands

Description

Select All

Select all Links/Sites in the Included list of the


Edit SRG window

Select None

Clear any link in the Included list of the Edit


SRG window

Highlight All On Map

Highlight all Links/Sites in the Included list of


the Edit SRG window on the Topology Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-102
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-31

Included menu

(continued)

Included menu commands

Description

Highlight Selected On Map

Highlight on the Topology Map only the


Links/Sites selected in the Included list of the
Edit SRG window

Set From Map Selection

Include the Links/Sites selected on the


Topology Map in the SRG. Links/Sites that are
not selected on the Topology Map are moved
to the Excluded list

Transfer Map Selection

Highlight in the Included list of the Edit SRG


window the Links/Sites selected on the
Topology Map

Excluded Menu

Links/Sites can be excluded from SRGs using the Excluded menu commands.
Figure 4-32 Excluded menu

Table 4-32

Excluded menu

Excluded menu commands

Description

Select All

Select all Links/Sites in the Excluded list of


the Edit SRG window

Select None

Clear any Links/Sites in the Excluded list of


the Edit SRG window

Highlight All On Map

Highlight all Links/Sites in the Excluded list


of the Edit SRG window on the Topology Map

Highlight Selected On Map

Highlight on the Topology Map only the


Links/Sites selected in the Excluded list of the
Edit SRG window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-103
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-32

Excluded menu

(continued)

Excluded menu commands

Description

Set From Map Selection

Exclude the Links/Sites selected on the


Topology Map in the SRG. Links/Sites that are
not selected on the Topology Map are moved
to the Included list.

Transfer Map Selection

Highlight in the Excluded list of the Edit SRG


window the Links/Sites selected on the
Topology Map

Transfer buttons
Figure 4-33 Transfer buttons

On the Edit SRG window, Links/Sites are moved between the Included list and the
Excluded list by selecting Links/Sites in either list and clicking a Transfer button.
Links/Sites that have been moved from one list are highlighted in the list to which they
have been moved.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-104
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Failures Scope
Failures Scope

An additional step in network planning and design is to consider the Failures Scope.
The Failures Scope defines the elements that will fail when performing a failure analysis.
By default, all line links (OMS) and all SRGs are included in the failure scope, and all
multirect Add/Drop blocks and all sites (nodes) are excluded in the failure scope. Failures
Scope allows the user to choose the set of resources (links, nodes, and SRGs) that will
fail. This feature enables the user to refine the failure analysis, study specific scenarios or
reduce the time of the simulation.
For information on how to perform tasks related to Failures Scope, see the following:

Edit a Failures Scope (p. 4-112)

Edit Failures Scope window

The Edit Failures Scope window is used to define manually the scope of the failure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-105
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Failures Scope window menu

The Edit Failures Scope window contains the following options:

Included
Excluded

Included menu

Links, SRGs, and Sites can be included in the failure scope using the Included menu
commands.
Figure 4-34 Included menu

Table 4-33

Included menu

Included menu commands

Description

Select All

Select all resources in the Included list of the


Edit Failures Scope window

Select None

Clear any resource in the Included list of the


Edit Failures Scope window

Highlight All On Map

Highlight all resources in the Included list of


the Edit Failures Scope window on the
Topology Map

Highlight Selected On Map

Highlight on the Topology Map only the


resources selected in the Included list of the
Edit Failures Scope window

Set From Map Selection

Include the resources selected on the Topology


Map in the failure scope. Resources that are
not selected on the Topology Map are moved
to the Excluded list.

Transfer Map Selection

Highlight in the Included list of the Edit


Failures Scope window the resources selected
on the Topology Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-106
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Excluded Menu

Links, SRGs, and Sites can be excluded from the failures scope using the Excluded menu
commands.
Figure 4-35 Excluded menu

Table 4-34

Excluded menu

Excluded menu commands

Description

Select All

Select all resources in the Excluded list of the


Edit Failures Scope window

Select None

Clear any resource in the Excluded list of the


Edit Failures Scope window

Highlight All On Map

Highlight all resources in the Excluded list of


the Edit Failures Scope window on the
Topology Map

Highlight Selected On Map

Highlight on the Topology Map only the


resources selected in the Excluded list of the
Edit Failures Scope window

Set From Map Selection

Exclude the resources selected on the


Topology Map in the failure scope. Resources
that are not selected on the Topology Map are
moved to the Included list.

Transfer Map Selection

Highlight in the Excluded list of the Edit


Failures Scope window the resources selected
on the Topology Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-107
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Transfer buttons
Figure 4-36 Transfer buttons

On the Edit Failures Scope window, resources are moved between the Included list and
the Excluded list by selecting resources in either list and clicking a Transfer button.
Resources that have been moved from one list are highlighted in the list to which they
have been moved.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-108
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Create an SRG

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create an SRG
When to use

Use this task to create an SRG.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) (p. 4-99)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to create an SRG.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path: Inputs > Edit SRGs.
Result: The Edit SRGs window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Edit SRGs window Main menu, follow this path: SRG > Create New.
Result: The Parameters tab of the Edit SRGs window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the name of the SRG in the Label field and click Apply.
Result: The SRG is created. As the default, no Links/Sites are included in the SRG.
To include or exclude Links/Sites in the SRG, see Include/Exclude Links/Sites in
SRGs (p. 4-110).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-109
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs


When to use

Use this task to include and exclude Links/Sites in an SRG.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) (p. 4-99)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task the SRG must be created. Follow the steps in the Create an
SRG (p. 4-109) task to create an SRG.
Task

Complete the following steps to include and exclude Links/Sites in an SRG.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select an SRG from the list of SRGs in the Edit SRGs window.
Result: The Included and Excluded Links/Sites for the selected SRG are displayed in
the Contents tab of the Edit SRGs window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use any of the following methods in combination or alone to include or exclude


Links/Sites in an SRG.

Select Links/Sites in either the Included or Excluded column and move as desired
between the columns using the direction arrows.
Select Links/Sites on the Topology map and then select the Set from Map Selection
item in either the Included menu or Excluded menu in the Edit SRG Main menu.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-110
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Delete SRGs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete SRGs
When to use

Use this task to delete an SRG.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) (p. 4-99)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task the SRG must be created. Follow the steps in the Create an
SRG (p. 4-109) task to create an SRG.
Task

Complete the following steps to delete an SRG.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select an SRG from the list of SRGs in the Edit SRGs window.
Result: The Included and Excluded Links/Sites for the selected SRG are displayed in
the Contents tab of the Edit SRGs window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Main menu, select SRG > Delete Selected.


Result: The selected SRG is deleted. Note: To delete all SRGs, select SRG > Delete
All SRGs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-111
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Edit a Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit a Failures Scope


When to use

Use this task to edit the Failures Scope.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Failures Scope (p. 4-105)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to include and exclude resources in the Failures Scope.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Topology map Main menu, select the Inputs menu.
Result: The Inputs menu is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do one of the following:

If the checkbox in the Automatic Failure Scope command is checked, click the
checkbox to unselect.
If the checkbox in the Automatic Failure Scope command is not checked, select Edit
Failure Scope.
Result: The Edit Failures Scope window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use any of the following methods in combination or alone to include or exclude resources
in the Failures Scope.

Select resources in either the Included or Excluded column and move as desired
between the columns using the direction arrows.
Select resources on the Topology map and select the Set from Map Selection item in
either the Included menu or Excluded menu in the Edit Failures scope Main menu.
Result: The Included and Excluded resources are displayed in the Included or
Excluded column of the Edit Failures Scope window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-112
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Edit a Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Failures Scope is saved and the Edit Failures Scope window is closed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-113
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 8: Design Parameters


Overview
Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit design parameters.
Contents
Design Parameters

4-115

WDM Layer Design Parameters

4-117

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

4-122

Set Design Parameters

4-125

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-114
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Design Parameters
Design Parameters

The next step in network planning and design is to consider the design parameters.
Set Design Parameters window

The Set Design Parameters panel is used to configure the WDM layer options and
optimization settings details. The window is divided into tabs which facilitate the design
configuration.
To access the Design Parameters panel follow this path from the Main menu:
Inputs > Set Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-115
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-37 Set Design Parameters window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-116
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WDM Layer Design Parameters


WDM Layer tab

The WDM Layer tab contains configuration options for the WDM layer.
Figure 4-38 WDM Layer tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-117
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel Properties parameters

The following sections describe the WDM layer Channel Properties.


Transponder bitrate & encoding

The Transponder bitrate & encoding field defines the size of the channel/trail that is set
on the WDM layer for TrxA and TrxB. Possible values are:

OCH10G~NRZ

OCH10G~NRZ~MLSE

OCH40G~PDPSK~PMDC

OCH40G~PDPSK~EFEC

OCH40G~PDPSK~EFEC~PMDC

OCH40G~COHERENT

OCH100G~NRZ~PDMQPSK~EFEC

OCH100G~NRZ~XR~PDMQPSK~EFEC

OCH40G~PDPSK

Note 1: For mixed formats 40G~PDPSK~XXXX/10G, it is recommended that the


40G~PDPSK~XXXX equipment is specified in the TrxA field.
Note 2:For mixed formats between either a OCH40G~COHERENT,
OCH100G~NRZ~PDMQPSK~EFEC, or OCH100G~NRZ~XR~PDMQPSK~EFEC and a
non-coherent format, OCH40G~COHERENT, OCH100G~NRZ~PDMQPSK~EFEC, or
OCH100G~NRZ~XR~PDMQPSK~EFEC must be specified in the TrxA field.
Note 3: If Free DCU is specified in the Dispersion Compensation field, only
OCH40G~COHERENT, OCH100G~NRZ~PDMQPSK~EFEC, and
OCH100G~NRZ~XR~PDMQPSK~EFEC formats are allowed in the TrxA and TrxB fields.

The field next to the TrxA and TrxB fields contains the maximum capacity per fiber for
the specified granularity. The default value is 80. Possible values are 1 - 96. This value
corresponds to the maximum number of wavelengths that a link could have.
The 10G TRB field defines the type of 10 G transponder for the entire network. Possible
values are TR2D1191 or TRBD1191.
Dispersion Compensation

The Dispersion Compensation field determines the Dispersion Compensation Module


(DCM) option that is used for spans.

Mix DCF & DC FBG for long span for long spans Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) is

used. For spans that are not long, Dispersion Compensation Fiber (DCF) is used. The
Mix DCF & DC FBG for long span option is the default.

Full FBG for applications in which spans are not long, DCF modules are replaced by

FBG modules to improve optical performance. In this case, all DCM are FBG.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-118
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Full DCF (no FBG) for applications in which spans are long, all FBG modules are

replaced by DCF modules. In this case, all DCM are DCF.


Free DCU for applications using 40 G coherent granularity only. No FBG modules
or DCM modules.

Dispersion Compensation parameter

The Dispersion Compensation field determines the Dispersion Compensation Module


(DCM) option that is used for spans.

Mix DCF & DC FBG for long span for long spans Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) is

used. For spans that are not long, Dispersion Compensation Fiber (DCF) is used.
Full FBG for applications in which spans are not long, DCF modules are replaced by
FBG modules to improve optical performance. In this case, all DCM are FBG.
Full DCF (no FBG) for applications in which spans are long, all FBG modules are
replaced by DCF modules. In this case, all DCM are DCF.
Free DCU allowed only for applications using xx G coherent granularity only. No
FBG modules or DCM modules. This is the default value if only xxG coherent
formats are present in the design. The Full DCF (no FBG) option is the default one
where at least one non coherent format is present in the design.

Channel spacing parameter

The Channel spacing parameter sets the default channel spacing for the network.
Possible values to set the Channel spacing globally are: 50 GHz, 100 GHz, or 200 GHz.
For information on channel spacing for optical subsets, see Optical Subsets (p. 4-89).
Ratio of concentrator ports to use parameter

The Ratio of concentrator ports to use field defines the maximum number of
concentrator ports to reserve for further use. A value of 1 indicates that 100% of the
concentrator ports can be used. A value of .05 indicates that only half of the concentrator
ports can be used. The value applies to all concentrators in the network. For ETHC boards
there is a maximum of 9 concentrator ports. For TRBC boards, the maximum ports is 4.
Amplifier Properties

The following sections describe the WDM layer Amplifier Properties.


Use 23 dBm

Activation of this field enables the line design to put an extra pump on the in-line
amplifier and booster if needed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-119
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Min BOL SL for RMPM (dB)

Sets the minimum BOL SL for Raman pump. Used for raman amplification, this
parameter sets the threshold above which the raman amplification is used. The value set is
the threshold which is applied on the Beginning of Life (BOL) span losses. ONDP
provides raman span padding which ensures the raman amplifiers will work properly, by
adding the necessary attenuator amount to compensate for the difference.
Padding fuse span (dB)

Sets the padding fuse span. By default, ONDP merges two successive spans as soon as the
sum of their losses falls below PFS -1 (1 PFS is due to the connector merging the two
spans). Increasing the value of this parameter allows more spans to be merged. Merging
more spans reduces the cost of the network but also reduces the optical transparency.
Alarms for amplifier gain out of range parameters

The following sections describe the fields to set the Alarms for amplifier gains out of
range. This parameter is supported only for line amplifiers (LOFA), and not for Add/Drop
amplifiers
Two values are calculated when a design is run and are set on an NE during installation.
These values are the thresholds needed to track (alarm) any silent failure on the WDM
line which results in a variation of the amplifier gain outside of a planned range. The
GMPLS uses this alarm to avoid using a line (restoration and forced traffic addition)
which is out of the planned design contractual limit, which results in a gain out of range.
If this feature is activated, ONDP calculates the values as follows:

Minimum Acceptable Gain (Gmin) indicates the minimum optimal gain, minus the
Gmin/Gmax margin.

Maximum Acceptable Gain (Gmax) indicates the gain End of Life plus the
Gmin/Gmax margin. (The gain End of Life is calculated as the gain at the beginning
of life plus the end of life margin).

The Gain Margin ONDP parameters allow the user to modify the Gmin/Gmax margin
value used to calculate the above values.
Activate

Click the checkbox to activate the Alarms for amplifier gain out of range feature. The
default state of this field is deactivated (blank). When this feature is deactivated, the Gain
Margin Value field are not accessible (greyed out). When checked, the Gain Margin Value
field become accessible. When this field is deactivated, the Gmin/Gmax default values
are provisioned.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-120
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Gain Margin Value

Click the slide indicator and move the mouse right or left to change the value indicated in
the Gain Margin Value field. The default value for this field is +2 dB. The allowable
range is +2 dB to 5 dB, with incremental steps of .25 dB allowed.
OMSs used parameters
Consider also unused OMSs

Click the checkbox to enable ONDP to consider in the design, all OMSs in the network
whether the links carry traffic or not. Conversely, if this checkbox is blank, only OMSs
used in transmission are considered in the network design.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-121
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic Setting Design Parameters


Traffic Setting tab
Figure 4-39 Traffic Setting tab

Routing

The Routing section set the Routing options


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-122
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Number of shortest path

The Number of shortest path field sets the number of shortest paths to be computed and
used during the RWA optimization. Default is 30.
Most disjoint on links/nodes

The Most disjoint on links/nodes checkbox indicates that certain design constraints are
released if no other solution is available. Checking the Most disjoint on links/nodes
checkbox allows certain conditions to infringe the disjointness rules that have been set.
This feature is only applicable to nominal and restored paths. It is not applicable to
GMRE Simulator cases (GMRE Audit Logs).
Protection

The Protection section sets the protection options.


Failures Count

The Failures Count field sets the number of failures per service. This field enables the
simulation of a failures in the network and restored services. SBR (Source Based
Restoration) is an unprotected service with restoration capability. PRC (Protection and
Restoration Combined) is a 1+1 protection service with restoration capability. The
minimum value for SBR is 1; 0 is not allowed. The minimum value for PRC is 2; values
of 0 and 1 are not allowed. For a value of N in the SBR field, the value of the PRC field
will be set to N+1.
Only 1 OCPU per 1+1

A check in the Only 1 OCPU per 1+1 checkbox activates the 1 OCPU per 1+1 protection
feature. A blank in this field is the default, indicating the feature is not active.
Traffic Engineering

The Traffic Engineering section sets the network optimization options.


Enhanced optimization nominal

The Enhanced optimization nominal checkbox prevents creating a design linked to the
order of the computed services. By default, services are computed in the order of
definition. The use of this field enhances the RWA optimization by performing a global
optimization, canceling the influence of service treating order, and reaching a
pseudo-optimal solution.
Add A/D Block instead of re-coloring

The Add A/D Block instead of re-coloring checkbox indicates that instead of
re-colorization, Add/Drop blocks should be used.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-123
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

By default ONDP optimizes the network in order to reduce the cost and to minimize the
number of A/D blocks. As a consequence re-coloring is used for regeneration. If the user
checks the Add A/D Block instead of re-coloring check box, it constrains the color when
regeneration occurs. In this case, the cost to the network could be higher.
Max link filling ratio for nominal

The Max link filling ratio for nominal field affects the filling of each fiber in the network
for the nominal path. The default value is 1.0 or 100%. This value allows the routing
engine to fill up the fiber to maximum capacity (100%). The maximum capacity is set in
the Channel Setting Design Parameters window using the field next to the TrxA or TrxB
fields. The Max link filling ratio for nominal field acts as an upper limit for the load
balancing.
Example: The Max link filling ratio for nominal is 0.5 and the maximum number of
channels is set at 80. These settings mean that for the nominal path, it is not possible to

have more than 40 channels. Anything above 40, is required to take another path.
Load balancing weight

The Load balancing weight field specifies the load balancing in the network. A value of
0, prevents any load balancing. The higher the value the more widely the channels will be
spread over the network.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-124
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs
Section 8: Design Parameters

Set Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set Design Parameters


When to use

Use this task to set network design parameters.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Design Parameters (p. 4-115)

WDM Layer Design Parameters (p. 4-117)

Traffic Setting Design Parameters (p. 4-122)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to set the design parameters.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:


Inputs > Set Design Parameters
Result: The Set Design Parameters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Set Design Parameters window, select the appropriate design parameter tab and
change the design parameters as required.
Result: The design parameters are set.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-125
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Inputs

Set Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
4-126
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Run the Network Design


5

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to run the network design. This chapter also
provides information on warning messages generated during the network design.
Contents
The Network Design

5-2

Run the Full Network Design

5-4

Run Partial Network Designs for Links

5-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
5-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Run the Network Design

The Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Network Design


Network Design

After creating the sites, links/spans, relations/services, and setting the design parameters,
the design analysis engine can be run to determine if the design is valid.
Full network design

ONDP provides the following types of design for network analysis. For information on
how to run the type of full design, see Run the Full Network Design (p. 5-4).

Run Full Design [Links+Traffic] - Runs the full design and produces a network

according to the specified design elements and network design configuration


parameters. Use this shortcut to run a links design followed by a traffic design.
Run Full Links Design only - Run a partial design to optimize optical parameters such
as amplifier position, dispersion mapping optimization, and amplifier type settings
optimization.
Run Full Traffic Design only - Run a partial design to resolve the traffic matrix.
Performs a routing, a wavelength allocation, a dimensioning, and a shelf computation.
This operation is only possible if a links design has been previously triggered.

Partial network design for links

ONDP provides an option for partial network design analysis for links.
Design Selected Links

The Design Selected Links option allows the user to run the links design analysis for
selected links only. This option runs all of the links design steps for the selected links.
Links Design Steps

The following lists the steps in the links design that is run on links.

Optimize Short Spans - for simple spans without amplifiers, this design step places

throughputs between spans instead of LOFA with an in-line attenuator.


Optimize Eq Sites Position - when too many spans are in a link, the Optimize Eq
Sites Position design step places equalization sites according to the performance of
the .
Optimize Chromatic Dispersion - this links design step corrects the dispersion of
wavelengths between nodes.
Optimize Amplifiers - this links design step chooses the amplifier type and output
power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
5-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Run the Network Design

The Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run Full Design icon color

The Run Full Design toolbar icon is colored to indicate the status of the network design.
Table 5-1

Run Full Design icon coloration

Icon color

Description
Design is to be confirmed. At least one critical
error exists.

Red
Line design has been completed. At lease one
critical error exists.
Orange
Full design has been completed successfully.
Event messages may exist.
Green
Blue

Full design has been completed with warnings.

Network Design Error Messages

If errors are detected while running the network design an Errors List report automatically
is displayed. The report provides information about warning messages and errors
generated during the network design. This report can also be displayed by selecting the
Show Errors Report option from the Results command on the Main menu. For more
information about this report, see Show Errors Report (p. 6-35).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
5-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Run the Network Design

Run the Full Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run the Full Network Design


When to use

Use this task to run the full network design.


Related information

See the following topic in this document:

The Network Design (p. 5-2)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to run a full network design.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

After completing the network design, do one of the following:

From the Topology Map Main menu, select Design > Run Full Design [Links +
Traffic]

From the Topology Map Main menu, select Design > Run Full Links Design Only

From the Topology Map Main menu, select Design > Run Full Traffic Design Only

From the Topology Map toolbar, select the Run Full Design icon.
Result: The selected full network design is run. A series of status windows are

displayed as the design calculation is in progress. Once the design calculation is


complete the Run Full Design icon changes color. For more information, see Run
Full Design icon color (p. 5-3).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
5-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Run the Network Design

Run Partial Network Designs for Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run Partial Network Designs for Links


When to use

Use this task to run partial network design analysis for links.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

The Network Design (p. 5-2)

Partial network design for links (p. 5-2)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.


Task

Complete the following steps to run a partial network design analysis for links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To run a partial network design analysis do one of the following:

From the Topology Map, right click the link and select Design Link from the Link
pop-up menu.
From the Edit Spans window Links table, select one or more links in the table and
right click in the table. From the Links pop-up menu, select Design Selected Links.
Result: The partial network design analysis is run.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
5-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Run the Network Design

Run Partial Network Designs for Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
5-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results
6

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to retrieve and view network design result and
reports.
Contents
Design Results and Reports

6-2

Show/Tune Selected Links Design

6-3

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

6-6

Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria

6-15

Show Graphical Statistics

6-17

Show Network Statistics

6-21

Show Failures Report

6-24

Show GMRE Audit Logs

6-31

Show Traffic Design Logs

6-34

Show Errors Report

6-35

Show Bill of Material

6-37

Show Bill of Material (multi-step)

6-38

Show Sites/Part List

6-39

Show Equipment View

6-40

Show Line View

6-41

Export Design Results Excel Report

6-45

Export BoM

6-71

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Design Results and Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Design Results and Reports


Design Results

ONDP provides different methods to view and adjust the results of the network design.
The list of design results and reports includes the following:

Show/Tune Selected Links Design (p. 6-3)

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics (p. 6-6)

Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria (p. 6-15)

Show Graphical Statistics (p. 6-17)

Show Network Statistics (p. 6-21)

Show Failures Report (p. 6-24)

Show GMRE Audit Logs (p. 6-31)

Show Bill of Material (p. 6-37)

Show Bill of Material (multi-step) (p. 6-38)

Show Sites/Part List (p. 6-39)

Show Traffic Design Logs (p. 6-34)

Show Errors Report (p. 6-35)

Show Equipment View (p. 6-40)

Show Line View (p. 6-41)

Export Design Results Excel Report (p. 6-45)

Export BoM (p. 6-71)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show/Tune Selected Links Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show/Tune Selected Links Design


Description

The Show/Tune Selected Links Design option displays the Edit route optical design
window which displays the results of a selected link design or a set of contiguous links (A
to B and B to A). The option also allows the user to change link parameters by clicking
any parameter and entering information in the field.
Access

To access the Edit route optical design window from the Topology Map do the following:

Click a link or links on the Map

Right click the link to display the link pop-up menu.


Select Show/Tune Design Results. The Edit route optical design window is displayed.

To access the Edit route optical design window from the Edit Spans window, do the
following:

Select a link or links in the Links table

Right click the Links table to display the Links pop-up menu
From the Links pop-up menu, select Show/Tune Links Design Results. The Edit route
optical design window is displayed.

To access the Edit route optical design window from the Main menu, do the following:

Select a link or links on the Map


From the Main menu, select Reports > Show/Tune Selected Links Design. The Edit
route optical design window is displayed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show/Tune Selected Links Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display
Figure 6-1 Edit route optical design window

Optical design parameters

Editable optical design parameters are those with a plus sign (+) appearing before the
parameter title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering
the value in the Edit route optical design window. To change a field, press the Tab key or
click in a different field. Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.
Warning: Interaction occurs between the Edit route optical design window and the Edit

Spans window. Changing a parameter in one window can affect the parameters in the
other. For example, if the Spans Count is changed in the Links table, the parameters for
the optical design are redefined in the Edit route optical design window.
Note: In the Edit route optical design window, preamplifiers and boosters are highlighted
in gray.
Table 6-1

Optical design parameters

Parameter

Definition

Site

Identifies site

Ampli type

Identifies the type of amplifier

Output Power [dBm]

Identifies the output power

FOA Inter Amplis [dB]

Indicates Fixed Optical Attenuator when a


double LOFA configuration is used

DCU Family

Identifies the DCU family

DCU Module

Identifies the DCU module

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show/Tune Selected Links Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-1

Optical design parameters

(continued)

Parameter

Definition

Ampli type (2)

Identifies the type of amplifier in case of


double amplifier

Output Power (2)

Identifies the output power in case of double


amplifier

BOL Loss dB

Identifies the Beginning of Life loss

BOL/EOL Loss Margin

Beginning of Life/End of Life loss margin

Length [km]

Sets the length

Fiber Type

Identifies the type of fiber

Att before Fib [dB]

Identifies attenuation before fiber

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics


Description

The Show Select Links Physical Diagnostics option displays link physical diagnostic
information in three windows:

Figure 6-2, Path Feasibility window (p. 6-7) - illustrates the signal power (dB) over
distance (km), indicating the path feasibility of a selected link or a set of contiguous
links. For mixed 10 G/40 G, services, a checkbox enables both types of service to
display at once, or the user can select one type of service to display.
Figure 6-4, Dispersion Map window (p. 6-9) - depicts the dispersion of wavelengths
(DCU mapping) of a selected link or a set of contiguous links
Figure 6-3, Optical design window (p. 6-8) - provides physical diagnostics
capabilities by displaying the optical design in graphic form of a selected link or a set
of contiguous links

The Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics window has capabilities such as Zoom In,
Zoom Out, Print, and Auto Range capabilities. To perform these actions, right click in the
window and select an action from the pop-up menu. For more information see Show
Selected Links Physical Diagnostics Pop-up Menu (p. 6-9).
Access

To access the physical diagnostics windows from the Topology Map do the following:

Select a link or links on the Map


Right click the link to display the link pop-up menu.

Select Show Physical Diagnostics. The Path Feasibility window is displayed.

To display one of the other physical diagnostics windows, select from the Graph field
list.

To access the physical diagnostics windows from the Edit Spans window, do the
following:

Select a link or links in the Links table


Right click the Links table to display the Links pop-up menu

From the Links pop-up menu, select Show Physical Diagnostics. The Path Feasibility
window is displayed.
To display one of the other physical diagnostics windows, select from the Graph field
list.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To access the physical diagnostics windows from the Main menu, do the following:

Select a link or links on the Map

From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics.
The Path Feasibility window is displayed.
To display one of the other physical diagnostics windows, select from the Graph field
list.

Display
Figure 6-2 Path Feasibility window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-3 Optical design window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-4 Dispersion Map window

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics Pop-up Menu

The Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics windows contain a pop-up menu that offer
additional actions to configure the display of the results. To access the pop-up menu, right
click in any of the Selected Links Physical Diagnostics windows

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-5 Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics pop-up menu

The following table describes the options in the Show Selected Links Physical
Diagnostics pop-up menu.
Option

Description

Properties

Opens the Chart Properties window, which


allows the user to configure the appearance of
the displayed information. For more
information, see Chart Properties window
(p. 6-11)

Save as...

Opens the Save window to save the Show


Selected Links Physical Diagnostics results to
a designated file name and location.

Print...

Opens the Page Setup window to configure


printer options and print the Show Selected
Links Physical Diagnostics results

Zoom In

Open the Zoom In pop-up menu, which allows


the display to expand to present a detailed
view of the physical diagnostics. Possible
Zoom In options are: Both Axes, Domain Axis
or Range Axis.

Zoom Out

Opens the Zoom Out pop-up menu, which


allows the display to contract to present a
wider view of the physical diagnostics.
Possible Zoom Out options are: Both Axes,
Domain Axis or Range Axis.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Option

Description

Auto Range

Opens the Auto Range pop-up menu, which


allows the display to contract or expand by
clicking in the window and dragging the
cursor to present the desired view of the
physical diagnostics. Possible Auto Range
options are: Both Axes, Domain Axis or Range
Axis.

Chart Properties window

The Chart Properties window enables the user to configure the appearance of the Show
Selected Links Physical Diagnostics results.
The Chart Properties window contains the following tabs:

Figure 6-6, Chart Properties window - Title tab (p. 6-12) - configure the text and
font properties of the selected link or set of contiguous links in the Show Selected
Links Physical Diagnostics results windows.
Figure 6-7, Chart Properties window - Plot tab (p. 6-13) - configure the color and
font properties of the labels, lines, axis, and background in the Show Selected Links
Physical Diagnostics results windows.
Figure 6-8, Chart Properties window - Other tab (p. 6-14) - configure additional
color and font properties of the Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics results
windows.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-11
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-6 Chart Properties window - Title tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-12
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-7 Chart Properties window - Plot tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-13
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-8 Chart Properties window - Other tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-14
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria


Description

The Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria option on the Results menu
displays a window which graphically depicts the optical feasibility of a link between
nodes. The Fast Feasibility Criteria (FFC) depicted in the window has update capabilities.
For example, if the Loss parameter is changed, the optical margin is updated dynamically.
When the FFC is positive, the signal can travel from the source to the destination with a
margin indicated by the value of the FFC. When the FFC value is negative, the signal
cannot travel from the source to the destination without regeneration. In addition, the
absolute value of the FFC provides an indication of when the regeneration can be
removed. For example, an FFC value of 0.5 dB indicates regeneration removal is
possible soon, while an FFC value of 2 dB indicates regeneration removal is not possible
at all.
Access

The following are the methods to display the Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria.
1. From the Topology Map do the following:
Right click a link to display the Link pop-up menu.
Select Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria. The FFC is displayed.
2. From the Topology Map do the following:
From the Icon bar, click the Optical Margin Tool icon.
Mouse over any link on the map. The FFC is displayed.
3. From the Edit Spans window, do the following:
Double click a link to display the Edit Spans window

Right click the Links table to display the Links table pop-up menu
From the Links pop-up menu, select Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria.
The FFC is displayed.

4. From the Main menu, do the following:


Select a link or links on the Map
From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Selected Links Real Time Fast
Feasibility Criteria. The FFC is displayed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-15
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display
Figure 6-9 Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria 10G

Figure 6-10 Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria Mixed 10G/40G

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-16
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Graphical Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Graphical Statistics


Description

The Show Graphical Statistics report option displays the design results on the Topology
Map in a graphical display. The display changes based on the selection in the Statistics
window.
The Statistics window

The Statistics window allows various design statistics to display graphically on the
Topology Map for both Sites and Links.
For Sites, the following graphical design statistics are displayed:

none

Inputs

Access Load
Add Drop

Nominal Outputs

Transit OEO+OOO
Transit OOO

Transit OEO (3R+Re-color)


- Transit OEO (3R)
- Transit OEO (Re-color)

Restoration Outputs

Transit OEO (Restoration)

For Links, the following graphical design statistics are displayed:

none

Inputs

Total Length
Total Loss
Spans Count
Administrative Cost

Nominal Outputs

TrxA Optical Margin

TrxA Non Feasible Optical Section


Channels Count

Restoration Outputs

Channels Count

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-17
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Graphical Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access

The following are the methods to display Graphical Statistics:


1. From the Main menu, do the following:
Select Reports > Show Graphical Statistics.

From the Statistics window, select the option button for the statistic you wish to
display graphically.

2. From the Topology Map, do the following:


From the Icon Bar, click the Show Graphical Statistic icon.
From the Statistics window, select the option button for the statistic you wish to
display graphically.
The Slide bar on the right side of the Statistics window increases or decreases graphically
on the Topology map the size of the currently selected statistic. As more statistics are
displayed on the Map, the statistical display can be increased or decreased so the various
graphics are easier to read.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-18
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Graphical Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display

The following are examples of the graphical display of selected statistics.


Figure 6-11 Spans Count graphical statistics example

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-19
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Graphical Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-12 Access Load graphical statistics example

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-20
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Network Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Network Statistics


Description

The Show Network Statistics report option displays, for each step in the incremental
design, high level statistical values of the network design optimization, which provide the
user a global view of the network design. The report is presented in two screens:

General Statistics - displays network statistics such as:

number of failed connections


number allocated optical bands

fiber link load


failure scenario, including number of dead and restored services
number of NEs with 3R resources

Statistics on Step - displays the following statistics on NEs and OMSs in the network

for each step in the incremental design


Number of Nodes
Number on OMSs

Average Degree
Maximum Degree
Minimum Degree

Access

To access the Network Statistics report do the following:

From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Network Statistics

The Network Statistics report is displayed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-21
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Network Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display
Figure 6-13 Network Statistics report - General Statistics tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-22
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Network Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-14 Network Statistics report - Statistics on Step tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-23
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Failures Report


Description

The Show Failures Report report option indicates the effect of failures on the network.
This report has three tabs:

Services shows failure effects from a service point of view

Scenarios shows failure effects from a scenario point of view

Filter allows the user to select specific OMS, nodes, or SRGs to analyze for

failures.
By right-clicking on different fields in each tab, pop-up menus list the options available
for each field in the report. These pop-up menus provide the ability to display the
restoration paths, as well as the nominal and restoration paths for each scenario or each
service. Additionally, the user can highlight and navigate between the related objects, the
Topology map and the Edit Services window.
Summary button

The Summary button of each service or scenario provides a visual descriptive summary
for that service or scenario. It appears as a colored button containing three sections
separated by a slash (/) that indicate the status of the service or scenario, as appears in the
following figure:
Figure 6-15 Service Summary button

The sections in the Summary button for services are as follows: xd/ymd/zr

xd - the number (x) of services that are down (d)


ymd - the number (y) of services restored with at least one partial disjointness rule

violation for at least one service (most disjointness - md)


zr - the number (z) of services restored (r) without any partial disjointness rule
violation

The sections in the Summary button for scenarios are as follows: xd/ymd/zr

xd - the number (x) of scenarios that are down (d)


ymd - the number (y) of scenarios restored with at least one partial disjointness rule

violation (most disjointness - md)


zr - the number (z) of scenarios restored (r) without any partial disjointness rule
violation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-24
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tab color description

The colors displayed on Services tab indicate the following conditions:

Green - for all involved failures, the service is Restored without any partial
disjointness rule violation
Red - the service is down for at least one involved failure
Blue - for all involved failures, the service is Restored with at least one partial
disjointness rule violation

The colors displayed on Scenarios tab indicate the following conditions:

Green - for all involved services, the failure scenario induces successful restoration
without any partial disjointness rule violation
Red - at least one service is down for that failure scenario
Blue - for all involved services, the failure scenario induces at least one Restoration

with at least one partial disjointness rule violation (but no service is down for that
failure scenario)
Access

To access the Failures Report do the following:

From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Failures Report

The Failures Report window is displayed. The Services tab is the default display.

Display

The Failures Report contains three tabs: Services, Scenarios, and Filter.
Failures Report, Services tab

The Services tab of the Show Failures Report lists failures on services in a hierarchical
tree. Right-click on each level in the tree to display a pop-up menu of available
commands for that level. For a list of commands descriptions, see Failures Report
pop-up menus commands (p. 6-29).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-25
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-16 Failures Report, Services tab

Services Summary icon - the top icon of the hierarchical tree in the Services tab provides

a visual descriptive summary of services. The icon appears as a colored button followed
by three section separated by a slash (/), The sections in the icon appear as follows:
ad/bmd/cr, where

ad - the number (a) of services that are down

bmd - the number (b) of services that are Restored with at least one partial

disjointness rule violation for at least one service


cr - the number (c) of services that are Restored without any partial disjointness rule
violation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-26
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Services Summary icon colors - the colors displayed in the top icon of the hierarchical

tree in the Services tab indicate the following conditions

Green - all services are Restored without any partial disjointness rule violation

Red - at least one service is Down

Blue - all services are Restored with at least one partial disjointness rule violation for

at least one service


Failures Report, Scenarios tab

The Scenaros tab of the Show Failures Report lists failures on services from a failure
scenario perspective in a hierarchical tree. Right-click on each level in the tree to display
a pop-up menu of available commands for that level. For a list of commands descriptions,
see Failures Report pop-up menus commands (p. 6-29).
Figure 6-17 Failures Report, Scenarios tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-27
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Scenarios Summary icon - the top icon of the hierarchical tree in the Scenarios tab

provides a visual descriptive summary of failure scenarios. The icon appears as a colored
button followed by three section separated by a slash (/), The sections in the icon appear
as follows: ad/bmd/cr, where

ad - the number (a) of failure scenarios that are down

bmd - the number (b) of failure scenarios that are Restored with at least one partial

disjointness rule violation for at least one service


cr - the number (c) of failure scenarios that induce successful Restoration without any
partial disjointness rule violation

Scenarios Summary icon colors - the colors displayed in the top icon of the hierarchical

tree in the Services tab indicate the following conditions

Green - all services are Restored without any partial disjointness rule violation

Red - at least one service is Down

Blue - all services are Restored with at least one partial disjointness rule violation for

at least one service


Failures Report, Filter tab

The Filter tab of the Failures Report allows the failures analysis to be filtered for specific
resources. To include or exclude resources, highlight the resource(s) and click the right or
left arrow button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-28
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-18 Failures Report, Filter tab

Failures Report pop-up menus commands

The following table describe the commands that are appear in the various pop-up menus
in the Failures Report. The commands that display are specific to the position in the
hierarchical tree. All commands do not appear in all pop-up menus. To display the pop-up
menu, right click in the tree.
Command

Description

Expand All

Expand the tree to display all information to the


lowest level

Collapse All

Collapse the tree to the highest level of


information

Highlight All Nominal on Map

Highlight all the nominal services on the


Topology Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-29
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Command

Description

Highlight Nominal on Map

Highlight the specific nominal services on the


Topology Map

Highlight in Table

Open the Edit Service window and display the


highlighted service(s) in the table

Highlight All Restored on Map

Highlight all restored services on the Topology


Map

Highlight Restored on Map

Highlight the specific restored services on the


Topology Map

Highlight Nominal + Restored on Map

Highlight the specific nominal and restored


services on the Topology Map

Navigate to

From the Services tab, navigate from the specific


service to the scenario in the Scenario tab. From
the Scenario tab, navigate from the scenario to
the service in the Services tab.

Highlight All on Map

Highlight all failed resources on the Topology


Map.

Highlight on Map

Highlight the specific failed resources on the


Topology Map.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-30
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show GMRE Audit Logs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show GMRE Audit Logs


Description

The GMRE Audit Logs report displays the results of the restoration and protection
analysis/failure analysis.
Access

To access the GMRE Audit Logs report do one of the following:

From the Main menu, select Tools > GMRE Simulator. The report is displayed

From the Main menu, select Reports > Show GMRE Audit Logs

Display

The information reported on the GMRE Audit Logs report is determined by the type of
scenario in which the GMRE Simulator used. The following links proved detailed
information on the GMRE Simulator use case scenarios.

GMRE Simulator use case 1 determine success of GMPLS dimensioning


(p. 7-9)
GMRE Simulator use case 2 evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration
dimensioning (p. 7-10)

Display

The information reported on the GMRE Audit Logs report is determined by the type of
scenario in which the GMRE Simulator is used. The following sections proved detailed
information on the GMRE Simulator use case scenarios and the information that is
displayed on the GMRE Audit Logs reports for each use case.
GMRE Simulator determine success of GMPLS dimensioning

In this use case, failure scenarios are simulated and the results allow the user to determine
if it is possible to restore successfully or if there are errors in the GMPLS dimensioning.
For more information, see GMRE Simulator use case 1 determine success of GMPLS
dimensioning (p. 7-9).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-31
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show GMRE Audit Logs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-19 GMRE Audit Logs report determining success of GMPLS dimensioning

GMRE Audit Logs report evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning

In this use case, the GMRE simulator is used to evaluate the tolerance of GMPLS
restoration dimensioning. For more information, see GMRE Simulator use case 2
evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning (p. 7-10).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-32
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show GMRE Audit Logs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-20 GMRE Audit Logs report evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration
dimensioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-33
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Traffic Design Logs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Traffic Design Logs


Description

The Show Traffic Design Logs report option displays logs on the network design.
Access

To access the Traffic design logs report do the following:

From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Traffic Design Logs

The Traffic design logs report is displayed.

Display
Figure 6-21 Traffic design logs report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-34
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Errors Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Errors Report


Description

The Show Errors Report option produces the List Errors report, which provides
information about warning messages and errors generated while running the network
design. These errors are reported for either network calculation or optical line design
errors.
Access

The List Errors report is displayed in the following ways:

From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Errors Report

If errors occur when running the network design, the report is displayed automatically.
For more information on how to run the network design, see Chapter 5, Run the
Network Design.

Display
Figure 6-22 List Errors report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-35
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Errors Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Errors list

The following is a list of possible errors reported while running the network design.
Table 6-2

List of reported network design errors

General Information

Detailed
Information

Type

Domain

Severity

Network optimization
failed

No physical path found

Design

Network

Critical

Network optimization
failed

Wavelength allocation
failed

Design

Network

Critical

Network optimization
failed

Disjoint path not found

Design

Network

Critical

Network optimization
failed

Constraint not fulfilled

Design

Network

Critical

Network optimization
failed

Service path
reservation failed

Design

Network

Critical

Network optimization
failed

Error in service
constraint loading

Design

Network

Critical

Optical line
optimization failed

Span too short

Design

Optical line

Critical

Optical line
optimization failed

Span too long

Design

Optical line

Critical

Optical line
optimization failed

Equipment not
recognized

Design

Optical line

Critical

SRG Violation

At least one restoration


scenario cannot fulfill
SRG constraints for
service

Network

Design

Warning

Disjointness violation
on links / nodes

Nominal paths partial


disjointness between
services S1 and S2

Network

Design

Warning

Disjointness violation
on links / nodes

Nominal paths partial


disjointness between
working and protecting
paths

Network

Design

Warning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-36
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Bill of Material

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Bill of Material


Description

The Show Bill of Material report option displays the list of materials needed to construct
the network.
Access

To access the Bill of Materials report do the following:

From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Bill of Material

The Bill of Material report is displayed.

Display
Figure 6-23 Bill of Material report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-37
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Bill of Material (multi-step)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Bill of Material (multi-step)


Description

The Show Bill of Material (multi-step) report option displays the list of materials needed
to construct the network for each step in the incremental design, for a series of steps in the
incremental design, or for the whole design.
The report provides Start step and End step sliders. When the two sliders have the same
value the entire Bill of Material is displayed for the chosen step. When the values of the
sliders are different, the Bill of Material for the chosen End step, beginning from the
chosen Start step is displayed.
Access

To access the Incremental Bill of Material report do the following:

From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Bill of Material (multi-step)

The Incremental Bill of Material report is displayed.

Display
Figure 6-24 Incremental Bill of Material report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-38
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Sites/Part List

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Sites/Part List


Description

The Show Sites/Part List report option displays the list of boards for each NE with
location and optical parameters.
Access

The following are methods to display the Sites/Part List


1. From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Sites/Part List
2. From the Topology Map, do the following:
Right-click a Site
From the Site pop-up menu, select Show Part List
Display
Figure 6-25 Part List report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-39
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Equipment View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Equipment View


Description

The Show Equipment View option displays the view of the specific equipment. Shelf
modifications are supported through this window. For more information on shelf
modifications, see Chapter 8, Modifications for ONDP Design.
Access

To display the Equipment View do the following:

From the Topology Map, click a site to display the Site pop-up menu.

From the Site pop-up menu, select Show Equipment View.

To toggle to the Schematic View, select Display from the menu, and check/uncheck
the Schematic View box.

Display
Figure 6-26 Edit Equipments report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-40
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Line View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Line View


Description

The Show Line View options display the path followed by all wavelengths supported by
the link.
The report permits the following views:

Show Line View (full spectrum) - displays the channels carried by the selected link

in their respective wavelength/frequency order in the optical spectrum. This view


could lead to a complex graphical display.
Show Line View (optimized) - displays the channels in a reordered way so that the
graphical display is optimally simplified.

Both the Show Line View (full spectrum) and the Show Line View (optimized) option
provides the following graphical display options:

Display ITU Id
Display Frequency

Display Wavelength
Display ITU Id/Frequencies
Display ITU Id/Wavelength
Display ITU Id/Protection
Display ITU Id/Trib

Display ITU Id/Location


Display ITU Id/WDM Format
Display ITU Id/Service Label

Access

To display the Line View do the following:

From the Topology Map, right click a link to display the Link pop-up menu.
Select either Show Line View (full spectrum) or Show Line View (optimized)

To change the information displayed, select Display from the main menu and select
the option button of the desired view from the drop-down menu, as shown in Figure
6-27, Show Line View Display options (p. 6-42)..

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-41
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Line View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-27 Show Line View Display options

Display the Ports View window

From the Line View window do the following to access the Ports View window.

From the Line View window, click the desired channel for which to display the Ports
View window. The rest of the window will be greyed out and the Open command on
the Main menu will become active.
From the Line View Main menu, select Open.
From the Open menu, select either Source Port Window to open the Ports View
window for the source port, or Destin Port Window to open the Port View window
for the destination port. The Ports View window is displayed, if the channel
transmission is made through a concentrator. For more information on the Ports View
window, see Ports View window (p. 8-16).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-42
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Line View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Show Line View display


Figure 6-28 Line View (full spectrum) report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-43
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Show Line View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-29 Line View (optimized) report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-44
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export Design Results Excel Report


Description

The Export Design Results Excel Report option produces a Network Descriptions Table
file in Excel format which can be used for manual commissioning. The Excel Export
Filtering window allows the user to select the specific data to export to the Network
Design Table.
Additionally, the file gathers all the network design input and output results such as
network topology, traffic matrix, service route information (nominal and restored), optical
margin per service and line design information. All the necessary network data (input &
output) are included in a unique file.
Figure 6-30 Excel Export Filtering window

Access

To export the file, do the following:

From the Main menu, select Reports > Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-45
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: If a full design has not been run, a Warning box displays the message
Network inputs have been modified. You need to rerun a full
design. If you decide to continue there will be no guarantee
on the output. Click Continue.
Result: The Excel Export Filtering window is displayed.

Select the data to be exported and click Apply.


Result: The Export to Excel window is displayed.
Navigate to the folder in which the NDT will be saved, and click Save.
Result: The report file is saved in .xls format in the selected folder.

Display

The Export Design Results report produces an Excel file, which presents the Network
Descriptions Table in an Excel spreadsheet. The follow table lists the tabs in the
spreadsheet.
Export Design Results tab title

Description

Figure 6-31, Descriptive Sheet tab


(p. 6-48)

Displays high level information describing the


network

Figure 6-32, Map tab (p. 6-49)

Displays the network as seen on the Topology


Map

Figure 6-33, Sites tab (p. 6-50)

Displays a list of the sites and the site parameters

Figure 6-34, Links tab (p. 6-51)

Displays a list of the links and link parameters.


This tab also contains links to spans details tabs.

Figure 6-35, Relations tab (p. 6-52)

Displays a list of the relations and relation


parameters. This tab also contains links to
services details tabs

Figure 6-36, BOM tab (p. 6-53)

Displays a Bill of Materials report for the


network

Figure 6-37, Part List Sites tab (p. 6-54)

Displays a list of sites with links to tabs which


contain Part Lists for each site.

Figure 6-38, Design Service Summary


tab (p. 6-55)

Displays a list of parameters summarizing the


service design result

Figure 6-39, Restoration tab (p. 6-56)

Displays restoration information for services

Figure 6-40, Graph Statistics tab


(p. 6-57)

Displays a Graphical Statistics report in


spreadsheet format

Figure 6-47, Network Design Logs tab


(p. 6-64)

Displays log information on the network design

Figure 6-41, Inter-NE Links, LT and Node


tab (p. 6-58)

Displays optical data of links and nodes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-46
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export Design Results tab title

Description

Figure 6-42, NE Parameters tab (p. 6-59)

Displays a listing of the NE parameters

Figure 6-43, Subsets tab (p. 6-60)

Displays information about Subsets

Figure 6-44, GMPLS Link Optical


Parameters tab (p. 6-61)

Displays the GMPLS attributes for each OMS


link in the network

Figure 6-45, GMPLS AddDropType per


Site (p. 6-62)

Displays all the possible AddDropType


references that could be used in the current
network, considering if the 100 G Coherent
format is or is not forecast in the current network
design.

Figure 6-46, SRG tab (p. 6-63)

Displays information about SRGs

Figure 6-47, Network Design Logs tab


(p. 6-64)

Displays the network design logs

Figure 6-48, OSNR NLP tab (p. 6-65)

Displays OSNR NLP evolution along a service


path

Figure 6-49, CD tab (p. 6-66)

Displays a chromatic dispersion report

Figure 6-50, PL Site X tab (p. 6-67)

Displays a schematic view and a detailed part list


of the equipment. This tab contains a link to the
Part List Sites tab. There is a separate tab for each
site.

Figure 6-51, SP Site-X Site-X tab


(p. 6-68)

Displays the span information between two sites.


There is a separate tab for each link.

Figure 6-52, Ser Site-X Site-X (p. 6-69)

Displays service information for each relation.


There is a separate tab for each relation.

Figure 6-53, DSF Mask 2 Forghieri grids


tab (p. 6-70)

Displays the frequency information for the DSF


mask 2 Forghieri grids

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-47
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-31 Descriptive Sheet tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-48
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-32 Map tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-49
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-33 Sites tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-50
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-34 Links tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-51
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-35 Relations tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-52
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-36 BOM tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-53
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-37 Part List Sites tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-54
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-38 Design Service Summary tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-55
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-39 Restoration tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-56
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-40 Graph Statistics tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-57
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-41 Inter-NE Links, LT and Node tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-58
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-42 NE Parameters tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-59
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-43 Subsets tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-60
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-44 GMPLS Link Optical Parameters tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-61
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-45 GMPLS AddDropType per Site

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-62
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-46 SRG tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-63
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-47 Network Design Logs tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-64
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-48 OSNR NLP tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-65
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-49 CD tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-66
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-50 PL Site X tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-67
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-51 SP Site-X Site-X tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-68
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-52 Ser Site-X Site-X

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-69
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-53 DSF Mask 2 Forghieri grids tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-70
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export BoM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export BoM
Description

The Export BoM produces output to the Comet software for automatic quotation based on
the BoM.
Access

To export the file, do the following:

From the Main menu, select Reports > Export BoM


Note: If a full design has not been run, a Warning box displays the message
Network inputs have been modified. You need to rerun a full
design. If you decide to continue there will be no guarantee
on the output. Click Continue.
Result: A Warning box displays the message File nn_BoM.xls will be
created in the current folder. nn is the name of the current project.

Click Continue.
Result: The ONDP dialog box is displayed.
Navigate to the folder in which the Export BOM report will be saved.
In the File Name field, rename the file if desired, or accept the default file name.
Click Save.
Result: The Export BOM report is saved in .xls format in the selected folder.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-71
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Design Results

Export BoM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display
Figure 6-54 Export BoM report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
6-72
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

7 etwork Analysis: Audit


N
and Upgrade

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on performing network analysis operations on an


existing network.
Contents
Network Configuration in ONDP

7-2

Network Analysis: Audit

7-4

Network Analysis: Upgrade

7-7

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis GMRE Simulator

7-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Network Configuration in ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Configuration in ONDP


Overview

ONDP users are able to perform network analysis functions such as auditing the network
and performing upgrades of network resources. These types of analysis can be performed
on a network created in ONDP or on an existing network that is loaded into ONDP.
The following is a list of types of network analysis ONDP is able to perform:

Service path analysis determine optical feasibility

Restoration analysis upon possible failures, determine the survivability of services


Network statistics analysis determine load requirements and identify bottlenecks or
weaknesses
Perform scenarios for specific failures or network changes (upgrade)

Methods to create and configure a network

The following are the methods of creating and configuring a network in ONDP.

Full manual network creation (p. 7-2) using the design inputs described in this
guide, manually create a network from scratch by adding all the design elements and
setting all the parameters. The network created is saved in ONDP as a .ondp file.

Semi-auto network creation (p. 7-3) load and use a previously created .ondp file
and manually update and fine tune network parameters. For more information, see
Open an Existing Project (.ondp file) (p. 4-11).

Full manual network creation

Manually building a network from scratch requires that the user configure the following:

Network topology create links and nodes (p. 7-2)

NE configuration set board type and shelf location (p. 7-3)

Optical line configuration set line tuning parameters (p. 7-3)

Service demands set spatial and spectral routes (p. 7-3)

Network topology create links and nodes

The user begins building a network by creating nodes and configuring the links between
the nodes. Parameters for the links are set at the link level as either input data or shown as
output results, which are computed by ONDP after the design is run.
For detailed information on creating nodes and configuring links, see Chapter 4, Design
Inputs. For detailed information on design outputs, see Chapter 6, Design Results

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Network Configuration in ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NE configuration set board type and shelf location

Currently, board type and shelf location are not manually configured in ONDP. However,
after running the design, the software provides a standard shelf configuration, which is
used when upgrading a network. When doing an upgrade, new resources are identified to
distinguish them from existing resources. The user must rearrange the shelf configuration
for the existing boards to match the ones installed in the field, if they are different than
the standard shelf provided by ONDP.
Optical line configuration set line tuning parameters

For the optical line configuration, the user sets the line tuning parameters for all optical
lines, using the Edit route optical design window. The following are examples of line
tuning parameters.

LOFA type

Output power
DCU type
DCU length
Fixed Optical Attenuator

For information on the Edit route optical design window, see Show/Tune Selected Links
Design (p. 6-3).
Service demands set spatial and spectral routes

To set the service demand, the user sets the spatial and spectral route constraints, as well
as the 3R/recoloring points.
The explicit routing constraints are the full descriptions of the paths either at the
physical/link layer (spatial path) or the lambda layer (spectral path). Explicit routing
constraints are required for setting the manual service route during existing network
creation. Explicit routing constraints are also required for wavelength preference support
when creating a network or upgrading an existing network.
For information on explicit routing constraints, see Relations and Services (p. 4-57) and
Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints (p. 4-86).
For 3R points, the default nominal path is set by specifying on which NE in the path the
WDM channel needs to be regenerated.
Semi-auto network creation

In semi-auto network creation, a previously created .ondp file is loaded to manually


update and fine tune network parameters. For more information, see Open an Existing
Project (.ondp file) (p. 4-11). After the existing network file is loaded, the existing
network resources are set and fine tuned as described in Full manual network creation
(p. 7-2).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Network Analysis: Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Analysis: Audit


Audit overview

The audit process is controlled through the use of a design mode parameter set on the
topology resources (links and nodes) and path constraints set on services.
Set Computation Mode parameter

The design mode parameter that is used to define how the audit process is controlled on a
resource is the Computation Mode parameter, located on the Edit Spans window. The
possible values of the Computation Mode parameter are:

Automatic hardware and tuning are automatically set by ONDP. Elements with this

setting are designed automatically.


Semi-Auto hardware data is input by the user. Tuning is automatically set by ONDP.
Manual hardware and tuning data are input by the user and are used by ONDP as is.
No optimization or design is performed on elements with this setting. Only an audit
and checking process is performed
NLP/OSNR non-linear effects contribution of the OMS and noise contribution are set
by the user. The user only sets the feasibility parameters describing the full link.
Those parameters, including PMD, are sufficient to describe the link completely in
terms of optical feasibility. Hardware description and tuning information is not
necessary. The feasibility parameters are used for path feasibility assessment.

For more information on the Computation Mode parameter, see Table 4-10, Links
parameters (p. 4-39).
Set Service constraints

The explicit routing constraints are the full descriptions of the paths either at the
physical/link layer (spatial path) or the lambda layer (spectral path). Explicit routing
constraints or Routing and Wavelength Allocations (RWA) are required for setting the
manual service route during existing network creation. Explicit routing constraints are
also required for wavelength preference support when creating a network or upgrading an
existing network.
For information on explicit routing constraints, see information contained Relations and
Services (p. 4-57)and Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints (p. 4-86).
Design modes are also set to control if 3R resources can be added or not. Manual: the tool
can add 3R resources during restoration. Audit: The tool cannot add 3R resources during
restoration and must use available resources.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Network Analysis: Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network audit and network design

The Computation Mode parameter and service constraints that have been set allow the
user to select which elements of the network are automatically designed and calculated by
ONDP, and which elements of the network are manually designed and set by the user. If
the user wants to perform a real network audit, then all resources are set to the Manual
or NLP/OSNR Computation Mode parameter and all services paths are fully described as
service constraints. If the user wants to perform an optimized or optimized network
audit, all resources are set to the Automatic or Semi-Auto Computation Mode and no
path constraints are defined in services.
Using the design modes and constraints, the user can define mixed configurations,
allowing parts of the network to be set manually and to be checked (audited) by ONDP,
and other parts of the network to be calculated and designed automatically.
Audit use case example

The following process describes a general network configuration audit use case scenario.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User creates an existing network. For more information, see Methods to create and
configure a network (p. 7-2).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User sets the design modes and constraints, determining which parts of the network are
set manually and checked (audited) by ONDP, and which parts of the network are
calculated and designed automatically. For more information, see Set Computation
Mode parameter (p. 7-4) and Set Service constraints (p. 7-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Once the network is configured the user can do one or more of the following:

Start the full network design. For more information, see Chapter 5, Run the Network
Design.
Perform a failures audit by choosing a set of resources (link, NE or SRG) for failure
and running the GMRE Simulator option in the Tools menu. For more information see
Edit a Failures Scope (p. 4-112) and Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis
GMRE Simulator (p. 7-9).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ONDP reports the results of the design and/or audit in the following ways.

Design status icons are indicated on the Topology Map. For more information, see
Run Full Design icon color (p. 5-3).
Design and audit results are reported by ONDP. For more information, see Chapter 6,
Design Results.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Network Analysis: Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

As soon as SBR or PRC services are in the traffic matrix, restoration simulation is
triggered for the full network. At this point, the user can select links or nodes and simulate
failures of these resources to view the impacted services and potentially view the
restoration routes for the restorable services.

Audit features

The following is a list of Audit features that ONDP can provide:

OMS line optimization for OMS lines that have the Computation Mode set to
Semi-auto, an OMS line optimization can be performed.
Audit optical feasibility for OMS lines for OMS lines that have the Computation
Mode set to Manual, an Audit optical feasibility can be performed.
Audit the optical feasibility of service routes for OMS lines that have the
Computation Mode set to OSNR/NLP, an Audit optical feasibility of service routes can
be performed.
Perform failure simulation for restorable services using ONDP the user can
simulate failures for restorable services. For more information, see Failures Scope
(p. 4-105), Show Failures Report (p. 6-24), and Show GMRE Audit Logs
(p. 6-31).
Analyze network load and highlight weaknesses using the reports such as Show
Graphical Statistics (p. 6-17) and Show Network Statistics (p. 6-21), the user can
analyze the network load and spot weaknesses. The user can see all the results of the
analysis by generating the Export Design Results Excel Report (p. 6-45).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Network Analysis: Upgrade

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Analysis: Upgrade


Upgrade overview

For an existing fully configured network, with set resources and fully configured routes,
the user is able perform an upgrade of the network. This is accomplished by adding new
resources or modifying existing resources. Resources that are added are tagged as new.
Additionally, existing resources can be selected to prevent inclusion in the upgrade.
Upgrade design

Prior to performing an upgrade, the user should define the upgrade design. There are three
possibly ways to design the upgrade:

Constrained upgrade design freeze the full existing network configuration and
perform the network optimization on added resources only. All resources should have
the Computation Mode parameter set to Manual.
Unconstrained upgrade design perform the network optimization on the full existing
network configuration as well as the added resources. All resources should have the
Computation Mode set to Auto or Semi-Auto.
Mixed upgrade design perform the network optimization on a set of resources
defined by the user. Resources included in the network optimization should have the
Computation Mode parameter set to Auto. Resources excluded from the network
optimization should have the Computation Mode parameter set to Manual, and have
spacial or spectral service constraints set.

Incremental upgrade steps

Incremental upgrade design steps provide a method of partitioning the network upgrade
into multiple user-defined steps. The user defines the topology and traffic matrix
information for each step. ONDP then performs the multiple step optimization and
provides upgrade results and BOM information on one specific step, a set of steps or for
all steps.
The upgrade design is divided into a series of numbered steps. The existing network
design is named Step 0 by default. The user determines the point in the upgrade design
when a new step in the incremental upgrade design is necessary. Successive steps in the
upgrade design are named Step 1, Step 2, and so on.
Upgrade design use case
Scenario:The user wants to upgrade an existing network by adding new links, nodes, and

services.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Network Analysis: Upgrade

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create and configure existing network in ONDP. For more information, see Methods to
create and configure a network (p. 7-2).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Determine the type of upgrade design. For more information, see Upgrade design
(p. 7-7).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update the network topology and traffic matrix by adding the new resources and services.
For more information, see Network topology create links and nodes (p. 7-2).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If necessary, select a new granularity in the Set Design Parameters window. For more
information, see Section 8: Design Parameters (p. 4-114).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exclude OMS lines from the upgrade by setting the Computation Mode to Manual.
Include OMS lines in the upgrade by setting the Computation Mode to Auto or
Semi-Auto. For more information, see Set Computation Mode parameter (p. 7-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exclude services from upgrade reconfiguration by setting service path spectral and/or
spatial constraints. For more information, see Set Service constraints (p. 7-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Start the network design and check design results status. For more information, see
Chapter 5, Run the Network Design.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Analyze upgrade results using reports. For more information, see Chapter 6, Design
Results.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis GMRE Simulator

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis GMRE Simulator


Overview

Failure analysis looks at the network design for an existing fully configured network with
set resources and fully configured routes, to determine the following:

will all restorable services survive failures?


are the current available resources sufficient?
are there unused resources?

Using ONDP, it is possible to dimension a network to be compatible with restoration


services such as SBR and PRC. Using the GMRE simulator tool it is possible to not only
dimension a GMPLS network but to audit the dimensioning and evaluate the restoration
capability of the network.
The GMRE Simulator tool determines if the GMPLS dimensioning is successful and if
restoration services will work. The tool evaluates the resistance to failures of a network
that has not been GMPLS dimensioned.
There are two types of scenarios in which the GMRE Simulator is used.

Failure scenarios are simulated and the results allow the user to determine if it is
possible to restore successfully or if there are errors in the GMPLS dimensioning.
Stress the GMPLS network dimensioned for a certain number of failures with more
failures than are designed in the GMPLS dimensioning to determine how many failure
scenarios succeed.

GMRE Simulator use case 1 determine success of GMPLS dimensioning

The following use case provides an example using the GMRE Simulator to guarantee the
success of the GMPLS dimensioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User creates an existing GMPLS network dimensioning it with N failures. During the
GMPLS dimensioning phase, 3R NEs dedicated to restoration are dimensioned for both
Transponder A and B. After dimensioning phase, ONDP automatically populates the 3R
for Restoration Count [TrxA] and 3R for Restoration Count [TrxB] fields on the Edit
Sites window, indicating that 3R NEs have been positioned for restoration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User defines the number of failures in the Set Design Parameters pages. The number of
failures is the same used in the GMPLS network dimensioning. For more information, see
Section 8: Design Parameters (p. 4-114).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis GMRE Simulator

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User launches the GMRE Simulator to simulate failures in the network using this path:
Main menu > Tools > GMRE Simulator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User analyses the results of the GMRE audit in the Show GMRE Audit Logs report. If
success is indicated, the GMPLS dimensioning is guaranteed. For more information,
see Show GMRE Audit Logs (p. 6-31).

GMRE Simulator use case 2 evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning

The following use case provides an example using the GMRE Simulator to evaluate
tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User creates an existing GMPLS network dimensioning it with N failures. During the
GMPLS dimensioning phase, 3R NEs dedicated to restoration are dimensioned for both
Transponder A and B. After dimensioning phase, ONDP automatically populates the 3R
for Restoration Count [TrxA] and 3R for Restoration Count [TrxB] fields on the Edit
Sites window, indicating that 3R NEs have been positioned for restoration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User defines the number of failures in the Set Design Parameters pages. The number of
failures is different from the number used in the GMPLS network dimensioning. For
more information, see Section 8: Design Parameters (p. 4-114).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User launches the GMRE Simulator to simulate failures in the network using this path:
Main menu > Tools > GMRE Simulator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User analyses the results of the GMRE audit in the Show GMRE Audit Logs report. The
report indicates scenarios that have failed as well as scenarios that have succeeded. For
more information, see Show GMRE Audit Logs (p. 6-31).

GMRE Simulator use case 3: restoration analysis

The following use case provides an example using the GMRE Simulator to perform an
audit to perform restoration analysis. The analysis can determine if restorable services
will survive failures, and if the current available resources are sufficient or if resources
are unused.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User creates and configures existing network in ONDP. For more information, see
Methods to create and configure a network (p. 7-2).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis GMRE Simulator

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the user wants to perform a real network audit, then all resources are set to the
Manual or NLP/OSNR Computation Mode parameter and all services paths are fully
described as service constraints. If the user wants to perform an optimized or optimized
network audit, all resources are set to the Automatic or Semi-Auto Computation Mode
and no path constraints are defined in services. For more information on the Computation
Mode parameter, see Table 4-10, Links parameters (p. 4-39).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

The user selects the list of elements (links, nodes, and SRGs) that are set to fail in the
Failures Scope window. For more information, see Failures Scope (p. 4-105).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User launches the GMRE Simulator to simulate failures in the network using this path:
Main menu > Tools > GMRE Simulator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User analyzes the results of the failure analysis in the Show GMRE Audit Logs report.
For more information, see Show GMRE Audit Logs (p. 6-31).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Additionally, the user analyzes results using the Show Failures Report (p. 6-24) and
Export Design Results Excel Report (p. 6-45) report options.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-11
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis GMRE Simulator

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
7-12
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

8 odifications for ONDP


M
Design

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to make manual modifications on shelves and
ports using the ONDP application, after a design has been run successfully.
Contents
Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

8-2

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

8-7

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts

8-15

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

8-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts


Overview

After running a network design, the user can manually modify shelves . These manual
shelf modifications are allowed on all sites except ILA and bypass sites. ONDP updates
the modifications in reports such as the Show Bill of Materials and Show Sites/Part List,
and modification status is indicated for the resource. For more information on the manual
shelf modification interface, see Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs Interface (p. 8-7)
Important! - manual shelf modifications are accepted by ONDP without checks of

coherence with 1626LM rules. Design is not guaranteed if manual modification is done
during incremental design. Manual modification can create conflict on the automatic
mode.
Supported shelf modifications

The following list describes the supported shelf modifications.

Move a board position in the same shelf or in a different shelf


Add a new shelf containing the default mandatory boards

Remove an existing shelf as long as it contains only mandatory boards


Add a new rack containing one shelf, containing the default mandatory boards
Remove an existing rack, as long as its shelves contain only mandatory boards
Move a shelf position

Move a rack position

Shelf modifications not supported

The following list describes the shelf modifications that are not supported.

Remove a board

Add a board
Move the position of a mandatory board
Exchange the position between boards of different sizes

Manual shelf modification are not supported for users with read-only profiles.
Shelf modification interface

Shelf modifications are made through the Edit Equipments window. For more information
on the interface, see Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface
(p. 8-7).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board modification status

Once the network design is run, the board modification status is reported in the Edit
Equipments window as an icon and the Show/Sites Part List report in the Status field.
This status indicates whether or not a board has been modified and/or frozen by the user,
or that the board is or is not modifiable.
The following table describes the board modification status.
Table 8-1

Board modification status description

Status

Status field description


(indicated in the Show
Site/Parts List report)

Status icon (indicated in


the Edit Equipments
window)

Auto-only

Indicates mandatory boards or


line shelves boards, which are
not able to be modified

Red lock icon

Auto

Indicates the board has not


been modified or frozen by
the user

No icon

Frozen

Indicates the board position


has been modified by the user
or has been frozen by the user

Black lock icon

Boards are given a status of Frozen in one of the following ways:

Direct command - the board position is modified by the user. The user can drag and
drop a board from one position to another.
Direct command - the board position is frozen by the user. The user can use the
Freeze command to prevent a board from modification.

Indirect command - a board is indirectly frozen as a result of the direct command to


freeze a related board.

Boards that have a Frozen status may also be unfrozen, with the direct Unfreeze
command. The Unfreeze command changes the board status to Auto.
Effects of the Freeze/Unfreeze commands

Freezing a board using the direct Freeze command can cause other boards to be frozen
indirectly. Also, boards previously frozen and then unfrozen can have an effect. Further,
freezing a board by direct command can have an effect on services.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

There are two types of boards to consider when determining the direct and indirect effects
of freezing or unfreezing.

Line boards - including WMAN_line and/or BMDX_line


Add/Drop boards - including WMAN_A/D, ALCT_Add or ALCT_Drop

For Add/Drop boards, the user must consider the following illustration to determine the
effects of freezing or unfreezing boards.
Figure 8-1 Add/Drop boards directions and sides

For Each Add/Drop board there are two sides for each direction.

In the Tx direction: Tx_Out (upstream) and TX_In (downstream)


In the Rx direction: Rx_Out (downstream) and Rx_In (upstream)

Effect of direct Freeze command on other boards status

When a direct freeze command is set on an Add/Drop board, the following indirect
settings occur on other boards. A freeze on a Line board does not involve these effects.

Upstream: between the board and WDM line, the status of all linked boards is
indirectly set to Frozen. Line board are not included. Note that for an OCPU board,
there could be up to four upstream paths in two directions: Tx_Out and Rx_In
Downstream: between the board and client traffic (service), the status of all linked
boards is indirectly set to Frozen. Note that for a concentrator or TR2D, the
downstream path could be divided into two or more paths, in two direction: Tx_In and
Rx_Out.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Effect of direct Unfreeze command on other boards status

When a direct unfreeze command is set from Frozen to Auto on a Add/Drop board the
following are the effects to the indirect settings on other boards statuses.

Upstream: between the board and WDM line, for both directions (Tx_Out and

Rx_In) along the cabling, boards are considered one by one, until a Line board is
reached:
If the next board (N+1) is connected to its own downstream board of the same
direction to another frozen N+1 board, board N is left at frozen and there is no
change to the status further in the upstream path.
If the N+1 board downstream in the same direction supports no frozen board then
it is indirectly set to Auto
Downstream: between the board and client traffic (service), the path directions (Tx_In

and Rx_Out) are treated separately. For a concentrator or a TR2D the downstream path
could be divided into two or more paths.

From the board, in both directions moving toward the services in the cabling, the
previous boards in the downstream chains are considered one by one. The
downstream boards in the downstream paths of the board are unfrozen. The status of
all linked boards is indirectly set to Auto.

For ALCT of EMPM boards, a freeze or unfreeze direct command is as if the command
were also a direct command on the board to which it is attached. A freeze or unfreeze
command on a board connected to an ALCT or EMPM implies that the same command is
made on the ALCT or EMPM.
Effect on services of Frozen status

When a transponder or concentrator status is set to Frozen either by direct or undirect


command, the corresponding service(s) directly linked to the board are effected in the
following ways:

A constraint is applied to each involved service as if the request Freeze []


Computed Path (Spatial + Spectral) were applied, with [] = [W] or [P], according
to the concerned board role (Working or Protecting) for the service. The constraint
will be the previous request or the previous computed value (the most recent of
those).
For multidirectional NEs, if for the service, the board handles the Working path, if the
NE is the service source, the Working Source A/D is set to its fixed or computed
value. (It is no longer set to Auto). If the NE is the service destination, the Working
Destination A/D is set to its fixed or computed value. (It is no longer set to Auto).
For multidirectional NEs, if for the service, the board handles the Protecting path. if
the NE is the service source, the Protecting Source A/D is set to its fixed or computed
value. (It is no longer set to Auto). If the NE is the service destination, the Protecting
Destination A/D is set to its fixed or computed value. (It is no longer set to Auto).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When a board status is set to Frozen, and the user modifies one of the above services, it is
as if a direct unfreeze request was applied to the board.
When a board status is set to Frozen, ONDP is able to attach new services and/or new
boards through the automatic design process.
Shelf modifications conditions and connectivity

Shelf modifications are allowed only after a successful design is run. A successful design
is indicated by a green flag on the Run Full Design icon on the Main menu.
Shelf modification is not allowed if the Node connectivity on the NE is set to Auto.
(Node connectivity is set using the Edit NE window).
If the status of at lease one board on the NE is set to Frozen, the Node connectivity
cannot be set to Auto.
Shelf modifications and Multidirection A/D blocks

If an action in the Edit NE window involves a decrease of the number of Multidir A/D
blocks, this request will unfreeze all boards with the Frozen status on the NE linked to
the suppressed Multidir A/D block(s).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface


Overview

After running a network design, the user can manually modify equipment. These manual
shelf modifications are allowed on all sites except ILA and bypass sites. ONDP updates
the modifications in reports such as the Show Bill of Materials and Show Sites/Part List,
and modification status is indicated for the resource. For more information on manual
modification of shelves, see Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts
(p. 8-2).
Edit Equipments window

Shelf modifications are done through the Edit Equipments window. To access the Edit
Equipments window, right click a site icon on the Map, and select Show Equipment View
from the Site pop-up menu.
Figure 8-2 Edit Equipments window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Equipments window Main menu

The Edit Equipments window Main menu contains the following options:

File

Edit

Display

File menu commands


Figure 8-3 Edit Equipments window File menu

Table 8-2

File menu commands and descriptions

File menu command

Description

Print

Print command

Exit

Close the Edit Equipments window

Edit menu commands


Figure 8-4 Edit Equipments window Edit menu

Table 8-3

Edit menu commands and descriptions

Edit menu command

Description

Copy to Clipboard

Copy the selected information to the clipboard

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display menu commands


Figure 8-5 Edit Equipments window Display menu

Table 8-4

Display menu commands and descriptions

Display menu command

Description

Zoom

Displays a list of Zoom options to make the


window image larger or smaller. Possible
options are: 600%, 200%, 100%, 66%, or 50%

Use Schematic View

Check the checkbox to display schematic


views of the equipment. This view shows the
equipment faceplates.

Left navigation tree

The left side of the Edit Equipments window contains a navigation tree. This area of the
window is used to:

Edit equipment
Add equipment
Freeze or unfreeze all equipment at a selected level
Delete equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 8-6 Left navigation tree

Display or highlight selected equipment in the Edit Equipments main panel

Using the left mouse button, the user can change the display of Edit Equipments window
main panel in the following ways:

Single left-click on an equipment in the navigation tree highlights the selected

equipment in the main panel


Double left-click on an equipment in the navigation tree displays only the selected
equipment and its components on the main panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Left navigation tree menus

Depending on the equipment level in the navigation tree, right click to display a menu for
the level.
Site level

There are no menus associated with top most Site level.


NE level menu and windows

The second level in the left navigation tree is the NE level. Right click an NE icon in the
left navigation tree to display the NE level menu.
Figure 8-7 NE level menu

The following table describes the options in the NE level menu in the left navigation tree.
Table 8-5

NE level menu options

Option

Description

Add Rack

Adds a default rack to the NE, with the


appropriate default equipment.

Freeze All Boards in NE

All boards with a status of Auto are changed to


Frozen

Unfreeze All Boards in NE

All board with a status of Frozen are changed


to Auto

Rack level menu

The third level in the left navigation tree is the Rack level. Right click a rack in the left
navigation tree to display the rack level menu.
Figure 8-8 Rack level menu

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-11
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table describes the options in the Rack level menu
Table 8-6

Rack level menu options

Option

Description

Add SubRack

Adds a default 1626 subrack to the rack with


default mandatory boards included.

Add PSS32 SubRack

Adds a PSS32 subrack to the rack with default


mandatory boards included

Freeze all boards in Rack

All boards with a status of Auto are changed to


Frozen

Unfreeze all boards in Rack

All boards with a status of Frozen are changed


to Auto

Delete Rack

Deletes the selected rack.

SubRack level menu

The fourth level in the left navigation tree is the SubRack level. Right click a rack in the
left navigation tree to display the subrack level menu.
Figure 8-9 SubRack level menu

The following table describes the options in the SubRack level menu
Table 8-7

SubRack level menu options

Option

Description

Freeze all boards in SubRack

All boards with a status of Auto are changed to


Frozen

Unfreeze all boards in SubRack

All boards with a status of Frozen are changed


to Auto

Delete SubRack

Deletes the selected subrack.

Edit Equipments window Main Panel

The Edit Equipments window Main panel presents the Network Element equipment
graphically.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-12
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 8-10 Edit Equipments window Main panel

Edit Equipments window menu

To access the Edit Equipments window menu, right click on the equipment, Note: If the
board modification status is Auto-only, indicated by a red lock icon, the menu will not
display. For more information on board modification status, see Board modification
status (p. 8-3).
The following menu displays for all boards, except concentrators.
Figure 8-11 Edit Equipments window menu - all boards except concentrators

The following menu is displayed for concentrator only.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-13
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 8-12 Edit Equipments window menu - concentrators

Edit Equipments window menu commands and descriptions


Command

Description

Freeze

The board status is changed to Frozen. If the


board status is Auto, this command is active.

Unfreeze

The board status if changed to Auto. If the


board status is Frozen, this command is
active.

Show Port Window (shown for concentrator

Opens the Ports View window for the selected


concentrator.

boards only)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-14
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts


Overview

After running a network design, the user can manually modify the ports configuration on
concentrators. These manual concentrator port modifications are allowed on TRBC1191,
TRBC4616, TRBC4617, 112SX10U, and ETHC1000. Modifications are allowed on the
same board only. The user may not modify ILA and bypass sites.
Manual concentrator ports management includes a port allocation modification or an
exchange between two ports allocation. WARNING : Modifications on ports must be
done symmetrically on source/destination and/or on working/protecting otherwise the
service will not work.
Important! - manual modification of concentrator ports are accepted by ONDP without

checks.
Concentrator port modifications conditions

The following conditions apply for manual port modifications:

A successful design must be run prior to modification. This is indicated by a green


flag on the Run Full Design icon on the Main menu.

Node connectivity on the NE must not be set to Auto. (Node connectivity is set using
the Edit NE window).

Manual management of ports on concentrators interface

Manual management of ports on concentrators is performed on the Ports View window.


for more information on this interface, see Manual Management of Ports on
Concentrators - Interface (p. 8-16)
In the case of a cascade of concentrators, (2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)
connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side), the user is able to toggle between the Ports
View line side and client side, using a Go to command. For more information, see Ports
View window (p. 8-16)
Concentrator ports Status

For each applicable concentrator port, the port status is reported in the Status field of the
Port View window. Possible values of the Status field are:

Auto - default value.

Frozen - given to a concentrator port when the port allocation is modified, either

individually or through an allocation exchange.


The user is able to manually modify each port status individually, from Auto to Frozen,
and from Frozen to Auto.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-15
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface


Overview

After running a network design, the user can manually manage ports on concentrators.
These manual concentrator ports modifications are allowed on all sites except ILA and
bypass sites.
Ports View window

The Ports View window enables the user to manually manage ports on concentrators. For
more information on manual concentrator ports management, see Manual Management
of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts (p. 8-15)
In the case of a cascade of concentrators, (2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)
connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side), the user is able to toggle between the Ports
View line side and client side, using a Go to command. as shown in the examples below.
Figure 8-13 Ports View window - Example 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-16
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 8-14 Ports View window - Example 2

Ports View window access

ONDP provides the following ways to access the Ports View window.

From the Edit Services window (p. 8-17). For more information on the Edit
Services window, see Edit Services window (p. 4-57)
From the Line View window (p. 8-18). For more information on the Line View
window, see Show Line View (p. 6-41)
From the Edit Equipments window (p. 8-18). For more information on the Edit
Equipments window, see Show Equipment View (p. 6-40) and Edit Equipments
window (p. 8-7)

From the Edit Services window

From the Edit Services window do the following access the Ports View window:

From the Services table, right click a service that contains a concentrator. The
Services table pop-up menu displays.
From the Service table pop-up menu, select Ports View. The Ports View pop-up
menu (p. 8-18) displays.
From the Ports View pop-up menu, select the appropriate command. ThePorts View
window (p. 8-16) is displayed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-17
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Line View window

From the Line View window do the following access the Ports View window.

From the Line View window, double-click the desired channel for which to display
the Ports View window. The rest of the window will be greyed out and the Open
command on the Main menu will become active.
From the Line View main menu, select Open.
From the Open menu, select either Source Port Window to open the Ports View
window for the source port, or Destin Port Window to open the Port View window
for the destination port. The Ports View window (p. 8-16) is displayed if the
channel transmission is made through a concentrator.

From the Edit Equipments window

From the Edit Equipments window do the following access the Ports View window

In the Main panel, right-click a concentrator equipment for wich the Ports View
window will be displayed. The Equipment menu is displayed
From the Equipment menu, click Show Port Window. The Ports View window
(p. 8-16) is displayed.

Ports View pop-up menu

The Ports View pop-up menu contains commands that open the Ports View window for
the selected concentrator.
Figure 8-15 Ports View pop-up menu

The following table describes the commands in the Ports View pop-up menu.
Table 8-8

Ports View pop-up menu

Command

Description

Working [W] Source Ports View

Opens the Ports View window to manually


manage working source ports for the selected
service

Working [W] Destination Ports View

Opens the Ports View window to manually


manage working destination ports for the
selected service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-18
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 8-8

Ports View pop-up menu

(continued)

Command

Description

Protecting [P] Source Ports View

Opens the Ports View window to manually


manage protecting source ports for the
selected service

Protecting [P] Destination Ports View

Opens the Ports View window to manually


manage protecting destination ports for the
selected service

Ports View window

The following table describes the fields in the Ports View window.
Table 8-9

Ports View window field descriptions

Client side
Field

Client side
Description

Ports

The port number on the concentrator. To


manage the port connection, click the Ports
field and select the new port from the
displayed list.

Status

The status of the port. Default value is Auto.


For more information, see Concentrator ports
Status (p. 8-15)

Connected to:

Information about the service or board to


which the port is connected.

W/P

Identifies the service as working (W) or


protecting (P)

Action

In the case of a cascade of concentrators,


(2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)
connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side),
the Go to command is displayed in this
column. Click the Go to command to toggle
between the Ports View client side and line
side Ports View windows

WDM line side

WDM line side

Field

Description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-19
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Modifications for ONDP Design

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 8-9

Ports View window field descriptions

(continued)

Client side
Field

Client side
Description

Connected to:

Information about the board to which the port


is connected.
In the case of a cascade of concentrators,
(2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)
connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side),
the Go to button is displayed in this field.
Click the Go to button to toggle between the
Ports View line side and client side Ports View
windows

The Connected to: field contains the following information:

For each tributary the direct next downstream connection (towards the client side) for
each port is displayed as follows:
If the board is directly linked to

a service - the service label is displayed (*)


another board (except OCPU) - the board type and location is displayed (**)
an OCPU - the OCPU type and location are displayed followed by a semi colon ;
and the direct next downstream connection as described in (*) and (**) above
The direct next upstream connection (towards the WDM line side) for each port is
displayed as follows:
If the board is a
tributary - the board type and the board location +port is displayed

OCPU - the OCPU type and location is displayed. Also the direct next upstream
connection board, type and board location +port for the Working and Protecting
paths is displayed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
8-20
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management
9

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to generate and calibrate background maps for
the ONDP application.
Contents
Map Generation

9-2

Launch the Map Generation Application

9-7

Generate a Background Map

9-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Map Generation
Map Generation overview

ONDP provides the Map Generation application, which enables users to generate multiple
calibration maps used in network design. After generation, the maps are displayed as
background maps, which are selected from the Choose the default background map
field at the start of the ONDP application, or at the start of a new network design.
Note: Initially, ONDP includes a default background map of Europe, referred to as
Europe [Relief] and a blank map, referred to as Empty Map.
Map Generation command file

The command file which runs the Map Generation application is stored in the ONDP root
directory, in the Programs folder. The command to run this file is:
ondp_mapbuilder.exe

The path to this file is:


Program Files/Alcatel-Lucent/ONDP X.X (where X.X is the release number).
Map source file

The user background maps are generated by the ONDP Map Generation application from
any source map file, as long as the file is in GIF, JPEG or PNG format, and is stored on
the user's PC.
Map generation and calibration process

Background maps are generated and calibrated through a five step process, presented in a
series of five Map Calibration windows. The steps are described in the following sections.
For detailed task information on map generation and calibration, see Generate a
Background Map (p. 9-8).
At the end of this process a new background map with the specified name is stored in the
ONDPMapDir folder. When creating a network design, generated maps can be selected and
displayed on the Topology Map as part of the network design.
Map Calibration - Step 1 window

The Map Calibration - Step 1 window creates the background map name and identifies
the user's source map file from which the background map will be generated.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 9-1 Map Calibration - Step 1 window

Map Calibration - Step 2 window

The Map Calibration - Step 2 window displays the user's source map file. From this
display, select the area of the source map which will be generated as the new background
map.
Figure 9-2 Map Calibration - Step 2 window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Map Calibration - Step 3 window

The Map Calibration - Step 3 window specifies a site on the north west part of the map.
This selects the pixels on the map where the first site is located. In this example, Paris is
the site specified.
Figure 9-3 Map Calibration - Step 3 window

Map Calibration - Step 4 window

The Map Calibration - Step 4 window specifies a site in the south east direction of the site
specified in the previous window. This selects the pixels on the map where the second site
is located. The further the sites are from each other, a better calibration is possible. In this
example, Lyon is specified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Map Calibration - Step 5 window

The Map Calibration - Step 5 window enables the user to enter names for the sites
selected in the previous calibration steps, and to indicate the Geographic Information
System (GIS) (latitude/longitude) coordinates of the sites for map calibration. This step
associates the pixels selected in Step 3 and Step 4 with the GIS information, to allow the
system to calibrate the map. Note: Accurate GIS information is essential to proper
calibration of the map. If inaccurate GIS information is used, the calibrated sites may not
be within the map area.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 9-4 Map Calibration - Step 5 window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Launch the Map Generation Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Launch the Map Generation Application


When to use

Use this task to launch the Map Generation application on the PC.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Map Generation (p. 9-2)

Before you begin

Before you begin this task, a source map file in GIF, JPEG or PNG format must be stored
on the user's PC.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Locate the executable application file ondp_mapbuilder.exe using this path:


C:/Program files/Alcatel-Lucent/ONDP X.X (where X.X is the release number).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Double click on the ondp_mapbuilder.exe executable file.


Result: The application is launched, and the Map Calibration - Step 1 window is
displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generate a Background Map


When to use

Use this task to generate and calibrate a new background map to use in network design.
Related information

See the following topic in this document:

Map Generation (p. 9-2)

Before you begin

Before you begin this task, a source map file in GIF, JPEG or PNG format must be stored
on the user's PC.
Task

Use this task to generate and calibrate a new background map.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the steps in the Launch the Map Generation Application (p. 9-7) to start the
Map Generation application.
Result: The Map Calibration - Step 1 window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Do the following:

In the Enter the map name field, enter the name of the new map.

In the Select map image field, click the File icon to open the Load background image
window. Use the file hierarchy to explore to the map source file. Select the map
source file and click Open.
Result: The map source file is selected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Next button.


Result: The Map Calibration Informations window displays the message
Select the area you want to keep on the map, and press Next
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the OK button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The map source file is displayed in the Map Calibration - Step 2 window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Map Calibration - Step 2 window, select the area of the displayed map source file
to be used in the new background map using any of the following tools:
Tool

Description

Zoom in icon

Click the icon to make the area smaller

Zoom out icon

Click the icon to make the area larger

Image Scale Icon

Click the icon to bring the map to initial size

Select all map icon

Click the icon to select the entire area of the


source map

Graphic box

Click and drag on the map to manipulate a


graphics box for the selected area

Result: The area to be generated as the background map is selected.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Next button.


Result: The Map Calibration Informations window displays the message
Place a site on the map, and press Next
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the OK button.


Result: The Map Calibration - Step 3 window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on the map where the initial site is located. This selects the pixels on the map where
the initial site is located.
Result: A black dot appears on the selected site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click the Next button.


Result: The Map Calibration Informations window displays the message
Place a second site at the south east of the first site, and
press next. The Further the sites, the better calibration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Click the OK button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Map Calibration - Step 4 window is displayed.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click on the map where the second site is located. This selects the pixels on the map
where the second site is located.
Result: A black dot appears on the second selected site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Click the Next button.


Result: The following two results occur:

A new background map is created and saved in the C:/Program Files/ONDP


X.X/ONDPMapDir folder (where X.X is the release number). The name of the file
is the name specified in the Map Calibration - Step 1 window. The file is saved in
the PNG format.
The Skip Calibration window displays the message
Do you want to skip the calibration phase?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Do one of the following:

If you wish to skip the map calibration phase, click the Yes button.
Result: The application is closed. End of Steps.
If you wish to continue with the map calibration phase, click the No button.
Result: The Map Calibration - Step 5 window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

In the Map Calibration - Step 5 window, do the following:

In the North West Point Informations section:

In the Site Name field, enter the first site name specified in the Map Calibration Step 3 window
In the Enter GIS X field, enter the longitude coordinate of the site
In the Enter GIS Y field, enter the latitude coordinate of the site
In the South East Point Informations section:

In the Site Name field, enter the second site name specified in the Map
Calibration - Step 4 window
In the Enter GIS X field, enter the longitude coordinate of the site
In the Enter GIS Y field, enter the latitude coordinate of the site

Click the Next button.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The message The map calibration end successful is displayed. and

the new background map will be presented in the list of available maps when
beginning a network design. For more information, see Section 1: Starting the
Design (p. 4-3).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-11
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Map Management

Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
9-12
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A/D

Add and Drop


Access Identifier (AID)

A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that
are defined for system architecture.
ACO (Alarm Cut-Off)

A push-button switch on the indicator strip that can be used to retire an audible office alarm.
ADM

Add and Drop Multiplex


A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET/SDH that allows lower level signals to be
added to or dropped from an optical carrier channel.
AFI

Authority and Format Identifier


AID

See Access IDentifier.


AIS

Alarm Indication Signal


A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
Alarm

External notification or display of failure condition. The indication of a failure towards an


external system interface or from audible or visible indicators.
Alarm Severity

Defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are processed depends on
their severity.
ALCT

Automatic Level ConTrol


ALS

Automatic Laser Shutdown

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AMS

Alcatel Maintenance Signal. There are two types of AMS: AMSs (for legacy submarine
equipment) and AMSt (for legacy terrestrial equipment)
ANTP

Alcatel Network Time Protocol


APA

Automatic Pre-emphasis Adjustment


APC

Automatic Power Control


APD

Avalanche Photo Detector


A diode that increases its electrical conductivity by a multiplication effect when hit by light. APDs
are used in lightwave receivers because the APDs have a greater sensitivity to weakened light
signals (for example, those which have traveled long distances over fiber).
APE

Automatic Power Equalization


APS

Automatic Protection Switching


A feature that allows a protection or standby entity (for example, optical line or board) to be
automatically selected and reconfigured if an incoming signal or equipment failure occurs.
APSD

Automatic Power ShutDown


APT

Amplifier Power Tuning


AS

Alarm Surveillance
ASAP

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile


ASIC

Application Specific Integrated Circuit


ATTD

ATTendeD (Alarm storing)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B&W

Black and White


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BDFB

Battery Distribution and Fuse Bay


Bit Error Rate (BER)

BER measures how accurately a bit stream is transmitted through a system. It measures how
many bits are received in error compared to how many are sent. It is the ratio of error bits
received to the total number of bits transmitted.
BMDX

Band Multiplexer DemultipleXer


BOFA

Band Optical Fiber Amplifier


BOL

Beginning of Life
BOM

Bill of Materials
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CAD

Channel Add-drop Card


Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line.
CBR

Constant Bit Rate


CD-ROM

Compact Disk, Read-Only Memory


CDR

Clock and Data Recovery


Ch

Channel
Channel

A communication path or the signal sent over that path.


CID

Card Identifier
CLEI

Common Language Equipment Identification


CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of
telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia and
are 10 bytes long.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CLI

Command Line Interface


Client-AIS

Alarm Indicator Signal (Client side)


CLNP

ConnectionLess Network Protocol


An OSI network layer protocol that allows data to be transmitted without first requiring that a
circuit be established.
CMDX

Channel Multiplexer DemultipleXer


COTDR

Coherent Optical Time Domain Reflectometer


CPE

Customer Premises Equipment


Refers to any type of telephone equipment, for example, answering machines, etc. on customer
premises.
CT

Craft Terminal
The user interface terminal used by craft personnel to communicate with a network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DAPI

Destination Address Point Identifier


DC_DC

DC/DC Direct Current Converter


DCC

Data Communication Channel - A portion of the SDH/SONET signal that contains alarms,
surveillance, and performance information.
Data Country Code
DCM

Dispersion Compensation Module


Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
DCN

Data Communication Network


DCNs support communication between NEs and the NMS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DCU

Dispersion Compensating Unit


See also DCM
DDM

Digital Diagnostic Monitoring


DEMUX or DMX

Demultiplexer
A module that separates two or more signals previously combined by compatible multiplexing
equipment.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

A protocol that automates the configuration of computers that use TCP/IP. DHCP allows a DHCP
server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack software. The number is
taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.
DSP

Domain Specific Part or Digital Signal Processing


DTMF

Dual Tone Modulation Frequency


DTV

Decision Threshold Voltage


DV

Digital Video
DWDM

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing


A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths
to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying
capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,
minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EAM

Electro Absorption Modulator


EC

Equipment Controller card


ECC

Embedded Channel Communication


ECID

Enhanced Card IDentifier


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-5
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ECMA

European Computer Manufacturers Association (Former standardizing information and


communication system organization)
ECT

Equipment Craft Terminal


EDFA

Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier


A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that been doped with erbium and spliced into the
operating single-mode fiber (SMF). A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is used,
with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the 1550
nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm, and one
outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.
EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory


A type of non-volatile memory often used to store inventory data.
EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility
The ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic
environment.
EMI

Electromagnetic Interference
High-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields that cause data corruption in cables passing
through the fields.
EML

Equipment Management Layer


Electroabsorption Modulated Laser - When laser is modulated using a Mach-Zehnder modulator.
EMPM

External Multi-Pump Module


EOL

End Of Life
Defines the status or values at the end of the guaranteed lifetime of a component. EOL is reached
when the wear-out failure rate dominates the component failure rate.
EOW

Engineering Order Wire


EPT

Engineering and Planning Tool

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-6
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ESC

Equipment and Shelf Controller


ESCT

Equipment and Shelf ConTroller


ESD

Electrostatic Discharge
Static electrical energy potentially harmful to boards and humans.
ESTI

European Telecommunication Standard Institute


Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart of ANSI. Its task is to
pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single
European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European
community.
EXP

Expansion
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FC

Fiber Channel
FDI

Forward Defect Indication


An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicated a failure in a server networking
layer (e.g. Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity
Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranding of Label Switched Paths (LSPs) and
errors in swapping LSP labels.
FEC

Forward Error Correction


A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer
includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.
The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate, and correct any errors created during
transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network
transit.
FIT

Failure In Time
A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion
operating hours.
FPGA

Field Programmable Gate Array


A user-configurable logic device that holds user-defined logic constructs and interconnects in the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-7
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

form of a microprocessor. Examples include EEPROM and FLASH.


FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to
enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using
the Internet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Gain

The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.


GbE

Gigabit Ethernet
A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area
networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit
Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many
enterprise networks.
GCC

Generic Communication Channel


GE_FC

Gigabit Ethernet Fiber Channel


GMPLS

Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching


GMPLS is an extension of the MPLS protocol used in data networks. MPLS is packet based
technology that combines the advantages of packet and circuit based networks. GMPLS is the
extension of this concept to cope additionally with SDH and OTH based transmission networks.
Therefore, GMPLS includes, in addition to packet switching capable devices (IP/MPLS), frame
(Ethernet), cell (ATM), timeslot (SONET/SDH, OTH), wavelength (optical channels) and spatial
(fiber) switching capable devices.
GMRE

Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) Routing Engine


GR

Guaranteed Restoration services


GUI

Graphical User Interface


A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the
program easier to use.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-8
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

HDLC

High Level Data Link Control


An ITU-TSS link layer protocol standard for point-to-point and multipoint communication. In
HDLC, the control information is always placed in the same position, and it uses specified bit
patterns very different from the data, thus reducing the likelihood of confusion.
HK

HouseKeeping
HW

Hardware
HWF

Hardware Failure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I/F

Interface
I/O

Input/Output
IDEG

Input DEGraded
IDI

Initial Domain Identifier


IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission


The international standards and conformity assessment body for all fields of electrotechnology,
including electricity and electronics.
ILM

Integrated Laser Modulator


ILOS

Input Loss Of Signal


IND

INDeterminate
IP

Internet Protocol
A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer
communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-9
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by
fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of
long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.
IS-IS

Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System


ISO

International Standard Organization


A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of
industrial and technical fields.
ISPB

Intra Shelf Parallel Bus


ISSB

Intra Shelf Serial Bus


ITU

International Telecommunication Union


A United Nations telecommunications agency established to provide standardized
communications procedures and practices including frequency allocation and radio regulations on
a worldwide basis.
ITU-T

International Telecommunications Union Telecommunication standardization sector. Formerly


known as CCITT: Comit Consultatif International Tlgrafique & Tlphonique; International
Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LAN

Local Area Network


1. A communication link between two or more points within a small geographic area, such as
between buildings. 2. A data network that has a size of normally up to 10 km. Important LANs are
Ethernet, Token Ring, Token Bus, and FDDI.
LAPD

Link Access Protocol on D-channel


A special protocol of the OSI Data Link Layer that provides the functional and procedural means
to establish, maintain, and release data link connections for NEs. For NE-NE communications
over the DCC, Layer 2 services are provided by LAPD.
LED

Light Emitting Diode


A diode made out of semiconductor material like Gallium-Arsenide that translates electrical
current into light. An LED is a semiconductor that emits incoherent light to show failure or
service state of a board. It is also used to show the alarm and status condition of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-10
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LH

Long Haul
A 10 Gbps application for transmission of 128 channels, giving a capacity of 1.28 Tbps and a
reach of up to 2000 km. Payload (per channel) can be one OC-192/STM-64 or four
OC-48/STM-16 signals.
LM

Light Manager or Line Manager


LOF

Loss of Frame
LOF is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.
LOFA

Line Optical Fiber Amplifier


Loopback

Type of diagnostic test used to compare an original transmitted signal with the resulting received
signal. A loopback is established when the received optical or electrical external transmission
signal is sent from a port or tributary unit directly back toward the output.
LOS

Loss of Signal
A condition where the optical input power falls below a prescribed threshold.
LR

Line Repeater
LSD

Laser ShutDown
LSP

Label Switched Path


LT

Line Terminal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MAC

Medium Access Control


MAC Address

A computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the media access control
sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols and identifies each node in a
network.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-11
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MIB

Management Information Base


A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.
MMF or MM

Multi Mode Fiber


MPLS

MuliProtocol Label Switching


MS

Multiplex Section
MU/SPC

A flat-polished MU type optical connector.


Multiplexing

The process of combining multiple signals into a larger signal at the transmitter by a multiplexer.
The large signal is then split into the original smaller signals at the receiver by a demultiplexer.
MUX/Multiplexer

A device (board) that combines two or more transmission signals into a combined signal on a
shared medium.
MZ

Mach-Zehnder
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NCTL (Network Element Controller) Board

The NCTL provides control and user interfaces at the NE level.


NDC

Negative Dispersion Chromatic


NDSF

Non Dispersion Shifted Fiber


NDSF

Non Dispersion Shifted Fiber


NE

Network Element
The basic building block of a telecommunications equipment within a telecommunication
network that meets SONET/SDH standards. Typical internal attributes of a network element
include: one or more high- and low-speed transmission ports, built-in intelligence,
synchronization and timing capability, and access interfaces for use by technicians and/or
operation systems. In addition, a network element may be a time slot interchanger.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-12
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NES

Network Element Synthesis


NML

Network Management Layer


NMS

Network Management System


Provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network, including
creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to external
systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement (SLA)
management.
NNI

Network-to-Network Interface
NRZ

Non-Return to Zero
A binary encoding in which ones and zeros are represented by opposite and alternating high and
low voltages and where there is no return to a zero voltage between encoded bits.
NSAP

Network Service Access Point (used in the OSI network layer).


An automatically assigned number that uniquely identifies a Network Element for the purposes of
routing DCC messages.
NTP

Network Time Protocol


An easy, accurate, and automatic method of getting and synchronizing date/time.
NURG

Not URGent
NZDSF

NonZero Dispersion Shifted Fiber


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OAC

Optical Amplifier Card


OADC

Optical Add & Drop Coupler


OADM

Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer


A network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical signals, without
converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction are done using
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-13
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

optical fibers and demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or reconfigurable.


In the latter case, optical switches need to be used.
OBC

On Board Controller
OCH

Optical CHannel
OCHA

Optical CHannel Adaptation


OCNC

Optical CoNnectivity Coupler


OCPU

Optical Channel Protection Unit


OCWR

Optical Continuous Wave Reflectometer


An instrument used to characterize a fiber optic link where an unmodulated signal is transmitted
through the link, and the resulting light scattered and reflected back to the input is measured.
ODU

Optical Channel Data Unit


OGPI

Optical Generic Physical Interface


OH

OverHead
OLOS

Output Loss Of Signal


OMDX

Optical Multiplexer DemultipleXer


OMS

Optical Multiplex Section or Optical Management System


OMSA

Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation


OMSP

Optical Multiplex Section Protection


OND or ONDP

Optical Network Design Platform


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-14
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OPC

Optical Protection Card


Optical Channel

An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.


OS

Operation System
OSC

Optical Supervisory Channel


The embedded overhead communications channel originating from 1626 NEs used for end-to-end
communications and maintenance. The OSC carries alarm, control, and status information
between network elements in a synchronous network.
OSCU

Optical Supervisory Channel Unit


OSI

Open System Interconnection reference model


A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks
standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the
standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant
system.
OSMC

Optical Spectrum Monitoring Control


OSNCP

Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection


OSNR

Optical Signal Noise Ratio


The ratio between the optical power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise signal.
OSPI

Optical Generic Physical Interface


OTM

Optical Transport Module, G.709


Provides bi-directional electrical/optical signal conversions in point-to-point applications. Optical
signals propagate at two wavelengths over a single fiber.
OTN

Optical Transport Network


Network used to transport user signals via ITU compliant wavelengths. The OTN is composed of
the OCH and OTS layers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-15
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OTS

Optical Transmission Section


The lower layer of the OTN that provides physical transport. The OTS layer is terminated on an
OTS terminating equipment.
OTU

Optical channel Transport Unit


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy


PDL

Polarization Dependent Loss


Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light
waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized
light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic
field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).
PDP

Power Distribution Panel


PDU

Power Distribution Unit


PDU

Protocol Data Unit


A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
PGE

Programmable Gain Equalization


PIN

Positive - Intrinsic - Negative


PM

Performance Monitoring
Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems (before
an alarm would be generated).
PMA

Physical Medium Attachment


PMD

Physical Medium Dependent

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-16
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PMD

Polarization Mode Dispersion


An inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation
velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The
net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different
polarization components travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the
received optical signal.
PMDC

Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensator


PPP

Point-to Point Protocol


An Internet Standard protocol. It establishes a link between two peer machines and maintains that
link by communicating through the hardware layer to the PPP layer on a peer system.
PRC

Protection and Restoration Combined services


PSUP

Power SUPply
PVID

Port Virtual IDentifier


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

QECC

Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel


QoS

Quality of Service
A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual
connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R-OADM

Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer


An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit
of this feature is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating a network.
RA

Remote Alarm
RAM

Random Access Memory

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-17
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RDI

Remote Defect Indicator


RECT

REmote Craft Terminal


RGMII

Reduced Gigabit Media Independent Interface


RI

Remote Inventory
RPO

Receiver Parameter Optimization


RS

Regenerator Section
RS-AIS

Regenerator Section - Alarm Indicator Signal


RS-AIS is a proprietary Alcatel-Lucent Management Signal, defined as an SDH RS frame, with
all ones except Frame Alignment Word and B1 parity.
RSOH

Regenerator Section OverHead


RUM

Replaceable Unit Missing


RUP

Replaceable Unit Problem


RUTM

Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch


RWA

Routing and Wavalength Allocation


The path and wavelength allocated to a service.
Rx

Receiver or Receive
RZ

ReturntoZero
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SAPI

Source Address Point Identifier


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-18
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SB

Short Band
SBR

Source Based Restoration services


SBS

Stimulated Brillouin Scattering


SC

Shelf Controller
SC/APC

An angle-polished SC type optical connector.


SCP

Serial Communication Problem


SD

ShutDown
SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy


A set of fiber-optics-based standards planned for use with SONET and ATM in Europe,
standardized by the ITU-T. Some of the SDH and SONET standards are identical.
SFP

Small Form Factor Pluggable


An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEE-802.3x) designed for use
with small form factor (SFP) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness.
SLA

Service-Level Agreement
SLTE

Submarine Line Terminating Equipment


SMF or SM

Single Mode Fiber


A type of fiber which is very small in diameter that allows the light to be reflected in a single way
along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.
SMS

Submarine Management System


SMSR

Side Mode Suppression Ratio

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-19
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SNCP

SubNetwork Connection Protection


SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol


A standard protocol for the management of entities in an IP local area network (LAN). The
protocol used to transfer information between the network elements and the element management
system (EMS).
SPI

Serial Peripheral Interface


SPLM

Smart Photonic Layer Manager


SPV

SuPerVision
SRG

Shared Risk Group


SSF

Server Signal Failure


SUPVY

Supervisory Channels
Support the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and orderwire
communication.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TCA

Threshold Crossing Alert


A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not
generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TCP

Transmission Control Protocol


A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between
computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of
the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing
through the Internet.
TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol


A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures, and
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-20
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TDF

Total Dropped Frames


TDM

Time Division Multiplexing


A technique for transmitting a number of separate data, voice, and/or video signals simultaneously
over one communication medium by interleaving a portion of each signal one after another.
TDMX

Tunable DeMultiplexer
TIM

Trace Identifier Mismatch


TimActDis

TIM consequent Actions Disabled


TL1

Transaction Language 1
A machine-to-machine communications language that is a subset of ITU's human-machine
language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. The messages and syntax are defined by
Telecordia.
TMN

Telecommunication Management Network


A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive
information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.
TP

Termination Point
TPD

TransPonDer
TR-OADM

Tunable and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer


TRBC

TRIButary Concentrator
TRBD

TRIButary Direct
TRCF

Total Received Correct Frame


TRCO

Total Received Correct Octet


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-21
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TRSEF

Total Received Service Errored Frames


TRU

Top Rack Unit


TTF

Total Transmitted Frames


TTO

Total Transmitted Octets


TTP

Trail Termination Point


Tx

Transmitter or Transmit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UAS

Unavailable Seconds
In performance monitoring, the count of seconds in which a signal is declared failed or in which
ten consecutively severely errored seconds (SES) occurred, until the time when ten consecutive
non-SES occur.
UDC

User Data Channel


UEP

Unequipped Equipment Present


UIC

User Interface Card


ULH

Ultra Long Haul


UNI

User-to-Network Interface
UR

UnRepeatered Systems
URG

URGent
USIB

USer Interface Board


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-22
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

USM

User Service Manager


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VCAT

Virtual Concatenation
Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into
individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual
Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the
SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous
concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation
does not.
VHM

Virtual Hardware Machine


VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network


A subset of a LAN. A VLAN is created by putting VLAN IDs in packets that indicate membership
to a VLAN of that ID. A Local Area Network (LAN) can have multiple VLANs within it, up to
the number of IDs available. Members (ports) of different VLANs do not see the traffic of
VLANs of which they are not members. A port may be a member of many VLANs.
VLH

Very Long Haul


VOA

Variable Optical Attenuation, Variable Optical Attenuator, or Variable Optical Amplifier


A device that corrects the signal strength differences that occur in the transmission line.
VSR

Very Short Reach


A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300
meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WAN

Wide Area Network


A communication network that uses common-carrier provided lines and covers an extended
geographical area.
Wavelength

The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,
typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and
the frequency. (Also called lambda).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-23
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WB

Wavelength Blocker
WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing


WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber
with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces
costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.
WIS

Wan Interface Sublayer


WMAN

Wavelength MANager
WSS

Wavelength Selective Switch


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

XFP

10-gigabit eXtended Form Factor Pluggable


A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one
compact, flexible, and low cost package format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ZIC

Zero Installation Craft interface


An NE-embedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
GL-24
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Index

A Add Spans to Links, 4-48

Audit, 7-4
................................................................................................
B Bill of Material, 6-37

Bill of Material (multi-step), 6-38


................................................................................................
C Change ILA Site Name, 4-34

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service,


4-82
Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span, 4-50,
4-50
Channel properties, 4-118
Close ONDP, 2-14
Computation mode, 7-4
Configurations, 4-17
Constraints, 4-57, 4-74, 4-86, 7-4
Create a Link, 4-46
Create a New Project, 4-9
Create a Relation, 4-78
Create an Optical Subset, 4-97
Create an SRG, 4-109
Create Services, 4-80
Create Sites, 4-24

Delete Sites, 4-29


Delete SRGs, 4-111
Design, 4-3
full network, 5-2
Design errors, 5-3, 6-35
Design inputs, 4-4
Design menu, 3-7
Design parameters, 4-115
traffic setting, 4-122
WDM layer, 4-117
Design results, 6-2
Dispersion Map, 6-6
Display menu, 3-4
documents
related, xx
................................................................................................
E Edge tooltip, 3-14

Edit a Failure Scope, 4-112


Edit Failures Scope window, 4-105
Edit Links and Spans, 4-47
Edit menu, 3-3
Edit NE Configuration, 4-26
Edit Relations and Services, 4-79

................................................................................................

Edit Services window, 4-57


D Delete Links and Spans, 4-54

Edit Site Parameters, 4-28

Delete Relations and Services, 4-84


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
IN-1
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Spans window, 4-37


Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints, 4-86

Installation
requirements, 2-2

Edit SRGs window, 4-99

Installer Welcome window, 2-4

Encryption, 4-5

Interface, 1-9

Export BoM, 6-71

................................................................................................

Export Design Results Excel Report, 6-45

L Launch ONDP, 2-13

................................................................................................
F Failure analysis, 7-9

Layer
WDM parameters, 4-117

Failures Report, 6-24

License key, 2-2

Failures Scope, 4-105

types, 2-2

Features, 1-2
File menu, 3-2
Functionality, 1-8
................................................................................................
G GMRE Simulator, 3-10

GMRE simulator, 7-9

Links, 4-37
parameters, 4-39
................................................................................................
M Main menu, 3-2, 3-2

Manual network creation, 7-2


Menu

................................................................................................

Design, 3-7

H Help menu, 3-10

Display, 3-4

................................................................................................

Edit, 3-3

Icons
link, 3-15
site, 3-13
toolbar, 3-11
traffic, 3-15
Identify a Link on the Map, 4-55
Identify a Relation on the Map, 4-85
ILA, 4-31
ILA AGE, 4-31
ILA parameters, 4-32
Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs, 4-110
Incremental design, 4-6
Inputs menu, 3-5

File, 3-2
Help, 3-10
Inputs, 3-5
Link, 3-17
Main, 3-2
Misc, 3-10
Relation, 3-18
Reports, 3-8
Site, 3-16
Tools, 3-10
Topology Map, 3-15
Merge Spans, 4-52
Misc. menu, 3-10

Install ONDP, 2-7


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
IN-2
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Multidirectional A/D blocks


differentiation, 4-19, 4-74
Mutual Disjointness, 4-76

Run Full Network Design, 5-4


Run Partial Network Designs for Links, 5-5
RWA, 4-57, 4-74, 4-86, 7-4

................................................................................................

................................................................................................

N NE configuration management, 4-16

S Services, 4-57

Network analysis

Services parameters, 4-70

audit, 7-4

Set Design Parameters, 4-125

upgrade, 7-7

Set Design Parameters window, 4-115

Network configuration, 7-2

Share Risk Group, 4-99

methods, 7-2

shelf modifications

Network design, 5-2

concepts, 8-2

Network Statistics, 6-21


New project, 4-9

Shelf modifications
interface, 8-7

................................................................................................

Show Bill of Material, 6-37

O Open an Existing Project (.ondp file), 4-11

Show Bill of Material (multi-step), 6-38

Optical design, 6-6

Show Equipment View, 6-40

Optical design parameters, 6-4, 6-4

Show Errors Report, 5-3, 6-35

Optical Subsets parameters, 4-90

Show Failures Report, 6-24

................................................................................................
P Part List, 6-39

Path Feasibility, 6-6


PGE, 4-31
................................................................................................
Q quality policy, xxii
................................................................................................

Show Graphical Statistics, 6-17


Show Line View, 6-41
Show Network Statistics, 6-21
Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria, 6-15
Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics, 6-6
Show Sites/Part List, 6-39
Show Traffic Design Logs, 6-34
Show/Tune Links Design Results, 6-3

R Regeneration

favor, forbid, 4-19


related documents, xx
Relations, 4-57
Relations parameters, 4-62, 4-62
Reports, 6-2
Reports menu, 3-8
Restoration analysis, 7-9

Sites, 4-13, 4-14


3R, 4-14
configuration, 4-16
generic, 4-14
ILA_AGE, 4-14
ILA_PGE, 4-14
multidirectional, 4-14
OADM, 4-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
IN-3
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

parameters, 4-20
terminal, 4-14
Sites/Part List, 6-39
Span parameters, 4-43
Spans, 4-37
Spans parameters, 4-43
Spatial constraints, 4-86
Spectral constraints, 4-86
SRG, 4-99
Step, 4-6
Subsets, 4-89
................................................................................................
T Toolbar, 3-2, 3-11

Tools. menu, 3-10


Traffic Design Logs, 6-34
Traffic setting design parameters, 4-122
Troubleshooting, 2-3, 5-3, 6-35
................................................................................................
U Uninstall ONDP, 2-12

Update ONDP Version, 2-10


Upgrade, 7-7
................................................................................................
W WDM layer design parameters, 4-117

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626LM ONDP R7.0
IN-4
3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0
Issue 4 March 2013

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi